AU2013201173A1

AU2013201173A1 - Heterocyclic compounds as lyrosine kinase modulators

Info

Publication number: AU2013201173A1
Application number: AU2013201173A
Authority: AU
Inventors: Alexey Vyacheslavovich Anikin; Alexander Chucholowski; Vidyasagar Reddy Gantla; Vlad Edward Gregor; Luyong Jiang; Aleksander Kadushkin; Yahua Liu; Danny Peter Claude Mcgee; Douglas Eric Mcgrath; Charles Chamchoumis Mikel; Jason Conrad Pickens; Sergey Sviridov; Thomas Roy Webb; Yan Zheng; Tong Zhu; Sergey Zozulya
Original assignee: Chembridge Corp
Current assignee: Chembridge Corp
Priority date: 2005-11-03
Filing date: 2013-02-28
Publication date: 2013-03-21

Abstract

The present invention provides compounds (1) to (6) capable of modulating tyrosine kinases, compositions comprising the compounds and methods of their 5 use (Formulaes I to VI).

Description

1 HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AS TYROSINE KINASE MODULATORS 1L FIELD OF THE INVENTION 100011 The present invention provides compounds capable of modulating tyrosine kinases, compositions comprising the compounds and methods of their use. 2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION [0002] According to the latest American Cancer Society's annual statistical report, released in January 2005, cancer has edged out heart disease as the leading cause of death in Americans under age 85. In 2002, the most recent year for which information is available, 476,009 Americans under 85 died of cancer compared with 450,637 who died of heart disease (those under 85 comprise 98.4 percent of the US population). Protein tyrosine kinases (PTK), which historically represented the majority of first discovered oncogenes, remain today one of the most important classes of oncology drug targets. [00031 Protein kinases are enzymes which covalently modify proteins and peptides by the attachment of a phosphate group to one or more sites on the protein or peptide (for example, PTK phosphorylate tyrosine groups). The measurement of protein kinase activity is important since studies have shown that these enzymes are key regulators of many cell functions. [00041 Over 500 protein kinases have been identified in the human genome ("kinome") (Manning et aL. (2002) Science. 298:1912). Based on the recent advances in deciphering the human genome, the family of human PTK consists of approximately 90 members (Blume-Jensen and Hunter (2001) Nature, 411: 355-3 65; Robinson et a]. (2000) Oncogene 19:5548-5557). This family can be divided in two major groups--receptor tyrosine kinases (RTK) and cytoplasmic (or non-receptor) tyrosine kinases (CTK)-- and approximately 30 subfamilies based on structural similarity (see, e.g., Bolen et al (1992) FASEB J. 6:3403-3409 (1992); Ullrich and Schlessinger (1990) Cell 61:203-212; Ihle (1995) Sem. InmunoL 7:247-254. PTKs are involved in regulation of many cellular processes, such as cell proliferation, survival and apoptosis. Enhanced activity of PTKs has been implicated in a variety of malignant and nonmalignant proliferative diseases. In addition, PTKs play a central role in the regulation of cells of the immune system. PTK inhibitors can thus impact a wide variety of oncologic and immunologic disorders. Such disorders may be ameliorated by 2 selective inhibition of a certain receptor or non-receptor PTK, such as LCK, or due to the homology among PTK classes, by inhibition of more than one PTK by an inhibitor. [0005] In some forms of cancer, a PTK mutation or structural alteration can increase the ability to proliferate, and thus, provides an advantage over surrounding cells. PTK of growth factor receptors, for instance, have been shown to be involved in the transformation of normal to cancerous cells (see, e.g., Rao (1996) Curr. Opin. Oncol. 8:516-524). PTK also play a role in the regulation of apoptosis or programmed cell death (see, e.g., Anderson (1997) Microbiol Rev. 61:33). By activation of PTK, apoptosis mechanisms can be shut off and the elimination of cancerous cells is prevented. Thus, PTK exert their oncogenic effects via a number of mechanisms such as driving proliferation and cell motility and invasion. These PTK include HER2, BCR-ABL, SRC, and IGFIR. [00061 There are many ways that a PTK can become oncogenic. For example, mutations (such as gain-of-function mutations) or small deletions in RTK and/or CTK are known to be associated with several malignancies (e.g., KIT/SCFR, EGFR/ERBBI, CSF-1R, FGFRI, FGFR3, HGFR, RET). Additionally, overexpression of certain types of PTK resulting, for example, from gene amplification has been shown to be associated with several common cancers in humans (e.g., EGFR/ERB3B1, ERBB2/HER2/NEU, ERBB3/HER3, ERBB4/HER4, CSF-lR, PDGFR, FLK2/FLT3, FLT4/VEGFR3, FGFR1, FGFR2/K-SAM, FGFR4, HGFR, RON, EPHA2, PEHB2, EPHB4, AXL, TIE/TIEl). For a review of oncogenic kinase signaling, and mutated kinase genes that may be used in the systems and methods provided herein, see Blume-Jensen and Hunter (2001) Nature 411:355; Tibes et al (2005) Annu. Rev. Pharmacol ToxicoL45:357; Gschwind (2004) Nature Reviews 4:361; Paul and Mukhopadhay (2004) Int. J. Med. Sc (2004) 1:101; . [0007] The majority of PTKs are believed to be important drug targets, especially for anti-cancer therapy. Indeed, a very large proportion of known PTKs have been shown to be hyperactivated in cancer cells due to overexpression or constitutively activating mutations and to directly drive tumor growth. In addition, a subset of RTKs, such as vascular endothelial growth factor receptors (VEGFR), fibroblast growth factor receptors (FGFR) and some ephrin receptor (EPH) family members, is involved in driving angiogenesis while others (e.g., Met and discoidin domain receptor (DDR)) promote cell motility and invasion (e.g., metastasis). [0008] The formation of new blood vessels, either from differentiating endothelial cells during embryonic development (vasculogenesis) or from pre-existing vessels during adult life (angiogenesis), is an essential feature of organ development, reproduction, and 3 wound healing in higher organisms. Folkman and Shing, J Biol. Chem., 267: 10931-10934 (1992); Reynolds et aL, PASEB J., 6: 886-892 (1992); Risau et al, Development, 102: 471 478 (1988). Angiogenesis is implicated in the pathogenesis of a variety of disorders, including, but not limited to, solid tumors, intraocular neovascular syndromes such as proliferative retinopathies or age-related macular degeneration (AMD), rheumatoid arthritis, and psoriasis (Folkman et al, J Biol Chein. 267:10931-10934 (1992); Klagsbrun et al., Annu. Rev. Physiol. 53:217-239 (1991); and Garner A, "Vascular Diseases". In: Pathobiology of ocular disease. A dynamic approach. Garner A, Klintworth G K, Eds. 2nd Edition Marcel Dekker, NY, pp 1625-1710 (1994)). For example, vascularization allows tumor cells in solid tumors to acquire a growth advantage and proliferative freedom as compared to normal cells. Accordingly, a correlation has been observed between microvessel density in tumors and patient survival with various cancers and tumors (Weidner et al, N Engl JMed 324:1-6 (1991); Horak et al, Lancet 340:1120-1124 (1992); and Macchiarini et al, Lancet 340:145-146 (1992)). [0009] A number of RTK have been identified that govern discrete stages of vascular development (Folkman et al, Cell, 87:1153-1155 (1996); Hanahan, D., Science, 277:48-50 (1997); Risau, W., Nature, 386:671-674 (1997); Yancopoulos et aL, Cell, 93:661-664 (1998)). For example, VEGFR2 (FLKI), a receptor for vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), mediates endothelial and hematopoietic precursor cell differentiation (Shalaby et al, Nature, 376:62-66 (1995); Carmeliet et at, Nature, 380:435-439 (1996); Ferrara et al, Nature 380:439-442 (1996)). VEGF also governs later stages of angiogenesis through ligation of VEGFRI (FLT1) (Fong et aL, Nature, 376:66-70 (1995)). Mice that lack VEGFR1 have disorganized vascular endothelium with ectopic occurrence of endothelial cells from the earliest stages of vascular development, suggesting that VEGFR1 signaling is essential for the proper assembly of endothelial sheets (Fong et aL, supra). Another tyrosine kinase receptor, TEK (TIE2) (Dumont et al, Genes Dev. 8:1897-1909 (1994); Sato et al, Nature, 376:70-74 (1995)) and its ligands ANG1 (Davis et al, Cell 87:1161-1169 (1996); Suri et al, Cell 87:1171-1180 (1996)) and ANG2 (Maisonpierre et al, Science 277:55-60 (1997)) are involved in assembly of non-endothelial vessel wall components. TIE (TIEl) is involved in maintaining endothelial integrity, and its inactivation results in perinatal lethality due to edema and hemorrhage (Sato, et al, Nature 376:70-74 (1995)). The TEK pathway seems to be involved in maturation steps and promotes interactions between the endothelium and surrounding vessel wall components (Suri et al., supra; and Vikkula et al, Cell 87:1181 1190 (1996)).

4 [00101 The EPH tyrosine kinase subfamily appears to be the largest subfamily of transmembrane RTK (Pasquale et al., Curr. Opin. Cell Biol. 9:608-615 (1997); and Orioli and Klein, Trends in Genetics 13:354-359 (1997)). Ephrins and their EPH receptors govern proper cell migration and positioning during neural development, presumably through modulating intercellular repulsion (Pasquale, supra; Orioli and Klein, supra). Bidirectional signaling has been observed for some Ephrin-B/EPHB ligand/receptor pairs (Holland et al, Nature 383:722-725 (1996); and Bruckner et al, Science 275:1640-1643 (1997)). For example, Ephrin-A 1 and Ephrin-B 1 have been-proposed to have angiogenic properties (Pandey et al, Science 268:567-569 (1995); and Stein et al., Genes Dev. 12:667-678 (1998)). Ephrin-B2, a ligand for EPHB4 receptor, was recently reported to mark the arterial compartment during early angiogenesis, and mice that lack Ephrin-B2 showed severe anomalies in capillary bed formation (Wang et al, Cell 93: 741-753 (1998)). [0011] Thus, blocking tyrosine kinase activity represents a rational, targeted approach to cancer therapy. Additionally, because tyrosine kinases have a number of other diverse biological functions, such as regulation of metabolism, cell differentiation, inflammation, immune responses, and tissue morphogenesis, kinases are attractive for drug development outside oncology. 3. SUMMARY OF TIHE INVENTION [0012] The present invention provides compounds that can modulate tyrosine kinases, compositions that comprise the compounds and methods of using the compounds for the treatment or prevention of diseases or conditions that are characterized by tyrosine kinase activity or expression including, for example, cancer, diabetes, restenosis, arteriosclerosis, psoriasis, angiogenic diseases and immunologic disorders. (see, e.g., Powis et al., 1994, Anti Cancer Drugs Design 9: 263-277; Merenmies et al., 1997, Cell Growth Differ 8: 3-10; Shawver et al, 1997, Drug Discovery Today 2:50-63; the contents of each are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties). [00131 In one aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to formula (1), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt or hydrate thereof: 5 Formula (1) RL Is Q1 N\Q2 N RK1 [0014] In formula (1), RKI is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl (such as allyl or methallyl), lower alkynyl (such as propargyl or 3-pentynyl), lower cycloalkyl (such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl or cyclopentyl), lower cycloalkyl-alkyl (such as cyclopropylmethyl or cyclopropylethyl), optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl (such as 2 methoxyethyl, 2-methoxypropyl, diethylaminoethyl or 3-dimethylaminopropyl), heterocycloalkyl (such as 3-tetrahydrofurfuryl or 3-piperidinyl), heterocycloalkyl-alkyl (such as tetrahydrofiurfuryl or 2-[2-(1-methylpyrrolidino)-ethyl)]), carboxamido, primary, secondary or tertiary carboxamido-, primary, secondary or tertiary sulfamido, hydroxy-, lower alkoxy-, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino, optionally substituted arylamido, or heteroarylamido, optionally substituted alkylsulfonyl, optionally substituted arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted sulfamido. [0015] In formula (1), each Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 and Q 4 is independently selected from: K K K CHO

(CH

2 )m (CH 2 )n (CH 2 )o (CH 2 )P 01 02 Q3 04 [00161 wherein m= integer from 1 to 5, in certain embodiments 1 to 3; [0017] wherein n= integer from I to 5, in certain embodiments 1 to 3; [0018] wherein o= integer from 1 to 5, in certain embodiments 1 to 3; [0019] and wherein p= integer from 1 to 5, in certain embodiments 1 to 3. [0020] In formula (1), R' is a selected from the following: 6

X

24 through X 27

X

24 through X 25 HNi (CH2) M

(H

2 ) MI MI IA M1_ O X40 X24 through

X

27

X

28 through

X

3 1 Z HN MA 1 HN \A M~_0 A 1 0ix 40

X

32 through X 3 5

X

32 through X 35

X

32 through X 3 5 HN HN -FH

M

1 0O M 1 0 MA 0

X

36 through X 39

X

36 through X 3 9

X

3 6 through X 3 9 HN (CH2) NC C MXM M HN4 HN(C2 HN (H 2 )2 MH X throughthrough X 36 through X 3 9 / H Xn certain e o n from through to3 (NCO> HN-Q o;H2N~ M' I hA 0M 1 _1K_ H 1 2A_ [0021J wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, ii, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3.

7 [0022] In formula (1), each W 1 through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen. [0023] In formula (1), each R1 0 is selected from: di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di-lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl. [00241 In formula (1), each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.

X

4 0 is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower aklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [0025] In formula (1), each Z' and Z 2 is independently selected from: a chemical bond or (CH 2 )r, wherein r is an integer from 0 to 6, or -(CF2)-(C=O)- or -(CF 2

)-(CH

2 )-. In Z and Z 2 , any of methylene group can be optionally substituted by one or more lower alkyl group(s), including substitution, forming geminal dialkyl, such as geminal dimethyl. They can be also optionally substituted by an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a hydroxy or lower alkoxy group. Optionally one or more of the methylene group(s) can be replaced by a heteroatom selected from -0-, -S-, -SO-, -SO2- and -N(X 4 ')-. Optionally, one or more of the methylene group(s) can be in the oxidation state of a carbonyl (keto-) group. [0026] In formula (1), M' is selected from: x 4 1 x 4

X

4 1 41 N N N X\ \

X

4

X

4 ' H X 41

X

41 X4 [0027] In formula (1), M 2 is selected from: 8 X44XX4 X~X4 x7 N N A3 X 4 1 X N4X 41 T'44 100281 In formula (1), T' is selected from:

X

4 1 RN A__ IN N X' X NNA X41N X K 4 'N X4 [0029] wherein A? is selected from (CIH2)q, -07-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 -- and -N(X 1 I)-; [0030] and wherein A 3 is selected from -GCl 2 -, or C=O. [00311 In formula (1), 1 1 K is selected from optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl. [00321 In formula (1), each X41 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, optionally substituted arylamino and heteroarylamino. Each optionally substituted group is optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl and heteroalkyl. [0033] In formula (1), each X 24 through X 3 9 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido, or carboxamido. [00341 In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to formula (2), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt or hydrate thereof: 9 Formula (2) RI XW-W7 Rs N .V V 0-'/ R2 R4 [0035] In formula (2), each X1 through X 5 is independently selected from: hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S oxidemethyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxidemethyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino. 100361 In formula (2), each R 4 and Ri is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or lower alkylthio. [00371 In formula (2), W 1 and W 2 are either carbon or nitrogen, but if W' is carbon, then W 2 is nitrogen and if W 2 is carbon, then W1 is nitrogen. If W' is carbon, it can be optionally substituted by a substituent

R

6 and if W 2 is carbon, it can be optionally substituted by a substituent R 7 . [0038] In formula (2), each W 3 through W 7 is independently either carbon or nitrogen and if carbon, they can be optionally substituted by a substituent X1 through X 5 . [0039] In formula (2), each R' and R7 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, halogen, hydroxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, or lower alkoxy. [0040] In formula (2), each RI and R 3 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino, sulfonamido, and ureido. In certain embodiments, each RI and R is independently hydrogen or -NH 2 . [0041) In formula (2), R 2 is selected from the following: 10 x 20 14 -R20 H ''N:[ X22 <R18 H X23 [00421 In formula (2), R' is -N-(X 4

)

2 , -COOXY or -CON e 2

)X

4 2 , wherein X 42 is as described below. [0043] In formula (2), each X 4 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, all optionally substituted by, for example, hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. Where appropriate, two X2 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 members, optionally substituted by hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. The heteroalkyl ring can have from 0 to 3 heteroatoms. Exemplary heteroalkyl rings include azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino and homopiperazino. [00441 For example, R' 8 can be selected from an optionally substituted nitrogen heterocyclyl, such as piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, homopiperazinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl-S-oxide, tbiomorpholinyl-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, or azetidinyl. The optional substituent is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl and heterocycloalkyl. 100451 In formula (2), R 20 is selected from the following: 11

X

24 through X 27

X

24 through X 25 (0X24mthroughX2 w I (CH2)m (CH2) R O > (CH

X

2 8 through X 1

X

3 2 through X 35 X32 through X 3 5 R RF

X

32 through X 35 X3 through X39 Xae through X 39 0 >4'OH

H

2

(CH

2 O 2

-R

1 0 X36 through X39 X24 through X 27

(CH

2 )r _ .A(C (C2'C A4 N-R12 RIO W(H2)-RO t(H0) (0H 2 )S

(CH

2 )

R

1 0 N'

X

42 (CHHtRu

X

4 2 N= N )u H H2) 'I

(CH

2 )u [00461 In formula (2), the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [00471 In formula (2), R" is aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy. In certain embodiments, R" is 3- or 4-pyridyl. [0048] In formula (2), R' 2 is heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl. In certain embodiments, R1 2 is 3- or 4- pyridylpropyl. [00491 In formula (2), each W1 through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen.

12 [0050] In formula (2), each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.

X

0 0 is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower alldyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00511 In formula (2), each A 4 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, A4is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00521 In formula (2), each A 5 independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, A 5 is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted beterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00531 In formula (2), each R1 0 is selected from: di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di-lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl. [00541 In certain embodiments, exemplary R' 0 include, but are not limited to, the following: 13 FN /N-4 N \O N \ N S=O FNV 1 J O R13 R'3 Ri3 RW3 R"3 ND N N-RJ N-R14 NrN-R14 R17 R17 R FNaN-R14 /N-\-1

N/

R1R R CH) R7 R C2s -1 CH2)sr~ cis or trans cis or trans cis or trans NN-(CH2)sH N N-(CH2)s N ----R--(CH2S N R13 R1 -R R R14 0) R4 [00551 wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [00561 In formula (2), each R 3 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxymethyl, methoxymethyl or may form a double bond to oxygen (C=0), thus giving the corresponding piperazinone derivative. [00571 In formula (2), each R1 4 is independently a lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4-pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as 1 -methyl-4 piperidinyl). [0058] In formula (2), each R 15 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, lower cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl-alkyl, heteroalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl or heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl), hydroxy-lower alkyl (such as hydroxyethyl), lower alkylaminoalkyl, lower dialkylaminoalkyl [0059] In formula (2), each R' 6 is selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino, N-heterocyclyl (such as azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino, homopiperazino, thiomorpholino, thoimorpholino-S- 14 oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide and their optionally substituted derivatives, where the substituent is selected from lower alkyl, lower hydroxyalkyl or lower alkoxyalkyl). [0060] In formula (2), each X 20 through X 23 is independently selected from: hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as pipcrazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino. 10061] In formula (2), each Xe 4 through X0 9 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido or carboxamido. [00621 In formula (2), each X 4 ' and R' 7 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, optionally substituted arylamino and heteroarylamino. Each optionally substituted group is optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lowcr alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl anido, heterocyclylanido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalcyl and heteroalkyl. [0063] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to fonnula (3), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt or hydrate thereof: 15 Formula 3 X3 x t 4

X

4 N x / R 2 y N R

R

5 RR 4 [00641 In formula (3), each W' through W 4 is independently carbon or nitrogen. When any W' through W4 is nitrogen, then the corresponding substituent X' through X 4 is absent. [00651 In formula (3), each X' through X 4 is independently selected from: hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, bomopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S oxidemethyl, thiomorpholino-8,S-dioxidemethyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino, any two groups taken together may form a cyclic structure. [00661 In formula (3), R 4 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or lower alkylthio. [0067] In formula (3), each R5 and R 6 is independently selected from hydrogen or methyl, or may form a double bond to oxygen thus forming an oxo-group, or may form a double bond to a nitrogen, thus forming an imino group, optionally substituted by lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyl-alkyl-alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl. 100681 In formula (3), Y is 0 or S or (CHq2) or NR 41 , wherein q=O to 6, in certain embodiments 0 to 3. R 4 ' is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyl-alkyl-alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or 16 heteroarylalkyl. Any one of the CH 2 group(s) can be optionally substituted by one or two lower alkyl groups. [0069] In formula (3), each R' and R is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, or ureido. In certain embodiments, each R' and R is independently hydrogen or -NH 2 . [0070] In formula (3), R2 is selected from the following: X 20 [ N-R20 H X218 H X23 [0071] In formula (3), R' 8 is -N-(X 2

)

2 , -COOX 2 or -CON(X 42

)OX

2 , wherein X 4 2 is as described below. [0072] In formula (3), each X 2 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, all optionally substituted by, for example, hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. Where appropriate, two X4 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 members, optionally substituted by hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. The heteroalkyl ring can have from 0 to 3 heteroatoms. Exemplary heteroalkyl rings include azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino and homopiperazino. {00731 For example, R 8 can be selected from an optionally substituted nitrogen heterocyclyl, such as piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, homopiperazinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl-S-oxide, thiomorpholinyl-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, or azetidinyl. The optional substituent is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl and heterocycloalkyl. [0074] In formula (3), R 20 is selected from hydrogen, C1..14 alkyl, C2.14 alkenyl, C2-14 alkynyl, C3-14 cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, all groups may be optionally substituted by a substituent selected from hydroxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, hereocycloalkyl. In formula (3), R 20 can also be selected from the following: 17

X

24 through X 27

X

24 through X 25

W

3 W.3

X

2 4 through

X

27 (CH2 R- (CH2)?Rn0(C -(CH 1 cj-(CH)

X

28 through X 31

X

3 2 through X 35

X

3 2 through X3 -- Ri ( CH2)n H-R 'R10 0 0 X1 through X 35

X

35 through X 39

X

3 through X 39 >7 4)/' 4{:F H O( 1O (CH 2 ) R HA -R " t(H2C R1 2 A Ri X3Ahruh 0 3 X(CHthrIo 2H70 (0H 2 )s

(CH

2 ) ( R )N 42 4(C(-CIH kR%1.X 2 X42 A5 R'X4 NN H N 2) [0075] wherein the independent integers m, nt, o, p, q, r, s, t, ui, v etc. arc from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [0076] In formula (3), R3' is aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy. In certain embodiments, R" is 3- or 4-pyridyl. [0077] In formula (3), R" is heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl. In certain embodiments, R1 2 is 3- or 4- pyridylpropyl. [0078] In formula (3), each W' through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen.

18 [0079] In formula (3), each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur.

X"

0 is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower alklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamnide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [0080] In formula (3), each A 4 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, A 4 is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or beteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialIyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. 10081] In formula (3), each A' independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, A' is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00821 In formula (3), each R' 0 is selected from: di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di-lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower allylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl. [0083] Exemplary R1 0 include, but are not limited to, the following: 19 F9 N-R14 N O\ N SN S=O N 94 N N3 N1 R N 3 N-14 N N-i [9 FN7 HOR14 FLNR14 R 1 7 RR17 Nk NR N 0 N N N -R

N(CH

2

)

5

R'

7 ( >CH 2 )shR-

R(CH

2 )< R cis or trans cis or trans cis or trans N--(, N N-(C--(CH O-R 13 N--CH2> R R' ') -R N R O N A14 R14 10084] In formula (3), each X 24 through X 9 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylanino, hydroxy, anido such as acetanido, or carboxamido. [00851 In formula (3), each R' 3 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxymethyl, methoxymethyl or may form a double bond to oxygen (C=O), thus giving the corresponding piperazinone derivative. [00861 In formula (3), R 14 is a lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4-pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as I -methyl-4-piperidinyl). [00871 In formula (3), each R 5 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, lower cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl-alkyl, heteroalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl or heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl), hydroxy-lower alkyl (such as hydroxyethyl), lower alkylaminoalkyl, lower dialkylaninoalkyl. [0088] In formula (3), each R 16 is selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino, N-heterocyclyl (such as azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino, homopiperazino, thiomorpholino, thoimorpholino-S- 20 oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide and their optionally substituted derivatives, where the substituent is selected from lower alkyl, lower hydroxyalkyl or lower alkoxyalkyl). [0089] In formula (3), each R 17 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, optionally substituted arylamino and heteroarylamino. Each optionally substituted group is optionally substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl and heteroalkyl. [00901 In formula (3), each X 0 through Xe 3 is independently selected from: hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino and also the following groups: (CH2)mN N-R4 so 2 R N hR14 (CH2)n N'O NR 1(CH2) N /\N-R 14 R13 R13 21 [0091] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to formula (4), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt or hydrate thereof: Formula 4 XAX XAS XAI VIVM N N _ A XA3 iol N 1 XA7

XA

4 XAS [0092] Compounds of formula (4) may exist in the form of one or more of the possible tautomers and depending on the particular conditions it may be possible to separate some or all of the tautomers into individual and distinct entities. It is to be understood that all of the possible tautomers, including all additional enol and keto tautomers and/or isomers are hereby covered. For example the following tautomers (double bond isomers), but not limited to these, are included. XAI XAS XAI XAS XA&' wV w4 V~ XA W 4 N -< ~ k,%JW 6 XA2 H weA XAr" o PiA N N Vwe -XA7 XAr' 'VAl N N WAD NXA7 I H H II HI kA4 xA8 A4 XA XAI XAS thrg X iAS I I XA3xA NWAI N N O XA XA IA kA4 kAS [0093] In formula (4), each WAl through WAS is independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. When any of the atoms denoted WA! through WA" is N, then the corresponding substituent denoted XAI through XAS is absent. [0094] In formula (4), each XAI though XA 4 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino (substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower 22 alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl). [0095] In formula (4), each XM through XA is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino (substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylanido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl), nitrogen-beterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino and also the following: O O HNsR2 R [0096] In formula (4), R's is -N-(X 42

)

2 , -COOX 2 or -CON(X 42

)OX

42 , wherein X 2 is as described below. [00971 In formula (4), each X 42 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, all optionally substituted by, for example, hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. Where appropriate, two X4 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 members, optionally substituted by hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or beteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. The heteroalkyl ring can have from 0 to 3 heteroatoms. Exemplary heteroalkyl rings include azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino and homopiperazino.

23 [0098] For example, R" can be selected from an optionally substituted nitrogen heterocyclyl, such as piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, homopiperazinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl-S-oxide, thiomorpholinyl-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, or azetidinyl. The optional substituent is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl and heterocycloalkyl. [0099] In formula (4), each R 20 is selected from:

X

24 through X 27

X

24 through X2

X

24 through X 27 ~rn1:,--(CH2)M 4 (CH2r (CH2 m1 "(CH }mn

X

28 through X 3 1

X

32 through X 35 X0 2 through X 35 I CH 2 )n 6-FR 0

X

32 through X3s X6 through X 39

X

36 through X 3 9 R 0 (CH 2

)

0 I

H

2 \R0H 2 0-R 1 0

X

36 through X 36

X

24 through X 2 7 (CH2)r O'(C Z (C24'i CH)-R12 RA-NC1

(OH

2

)

4 R(1N'X42 N X42 X42 O(CH2)t-Ri ' YX42 N--X N- )u XNH H2)u [001001 wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3.

24 [001011 In formula (4), each W' through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen. [00102] In formula (4), R" is aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy. In certain embodiments, R" is 3- or 4-pyridyl. (00103] In formula (4), R' 2 is heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl. In certain embodiments,

R'

2 is 3 - or 4- pyridylpropyl. [00104] In formula (4), each W1 through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen. [00105] In formula (4), each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. X4" is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower alklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00106] In formula (4), each A 4 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, A 4 is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00107] In formula (4), each A$ independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, As is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00108] In formula (4), each R' 0 is selected from: di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di-lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylarninocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl. [00109] Exemplary R1 0 include, but are not limited to, the following: 25 N N-R14 N N N s=o hN R13 R13 Ri3 RW3 R 3 N1 -NI N R N -R14 LC N-R RF RN-7 1 N -R13

QR

1 7 N N-Ri N (CH2) R 17

R

1

CH

2 -CR

(CH

2 ) cis or trans cis or trans cis or trans R N-(CH2)s O < IN-(C2 ) R13 N-(CH2)s -R' N o1 A14 [001101 wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, V etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [001111 In formula (4), each X 4 through X 39 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido, or carboxamido. [00112] In formula (4), each R" is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxymethyl, methoxymethyl or may form a double bond to oxygen (C=0), thus giving the corresponding piperazinone derivative. [001131 In formula (4), each R1 is a lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4-pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as 1-methyl-4-piperidinyl). 1001141 In formula (4), each R' 5 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, lower cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl-alkyl, heteroalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl or heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl), hydroxy-lower alkyl (such as hydroxyethyl), lower alkylarinoalkyl, lower dialkylaminaalkyl.

26 [001151 In formula (4), each R' 6 is selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylarnino, N-heterocyclyl (such as azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino, homopiperazino, thiomorpholino, thoimorpholino-S oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide and their optionally substituted derivatives, where the substituent is selected from lower alkyl, lower hydroxyalkyl or lower alkoxyaUcyl). [00116] In formula (4), each R 1 7 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00117] In formula (4), each X through X 2 ' are independently selected from: hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino. [00118] In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to formula (5), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt or hydrate thereof: Formula 5 ysB1 OH a OH I WB N W 5

X

8 XB2--W~ / H xB3

X

8 4

XE

8 27 [00119] In formula (5), each W]3I through WaB is independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. When any WI through W88 is N, then the corresponding substituent(s) X 8 ' through XB is absent. [00120] Compounds according to formula (5) can also be depicted in their respective "keto" form, which under certain conditions may predominate over the corresponding "enol" form. However, all possible tautomers and stereoisomers (such as for example, but not limited to: E and Z, (trans and cis) are incorporated herein. [00121] In formula (5), each X' through XB 4 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, optionally substituted lower alkyl, optionally substituted lower alkoxy, optionally substituted acylamino, optionally substituted sulfonamido, optionally substituted ureido, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, cyano, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino (substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylanido, optionally substituted heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl), nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide-methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxyalkyl, lower alkoxyalkyl, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino-alkyl, lower alkyl cycloalkyl or heterocycloalkyl). Such aryl and heteroaryl groups can be bicyclic in certain embodiments. In the above list, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, acyl amino, sulfonamido and ureido can be substituted, for example, with aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or cycloheteroalkyl. [00122] In certain embodiments, any adjacent pair of Xal through X34 can be joined to form a cycloalkyl, cylcoheteroalkyl, aryl or heteroaryl ring fused to the ring comprising WBI through WB. Exemplary fused rings include naphthyl, benzodioxolyl, benzofuranyl, benzodioxinyl, dihydrobenzodioxinyI, and others that will be recognized by those of skill in the art. In further embodiments, two pairs of X 1 through X 8 4 can be joined to form a fused 28 tricylcic ring system. Exemplary tricyclic rings include julolidinyl, tetramethyl julolidinyl and others that will be recognized by those of skill in the art [001231 A specific exclusion is provided that when WBI is nitrogen, X8 is not the following group: OH H R24K , NY [001241 Wherein R is an optionally substituted aryl. [001251 In formula (5), each XB3 can be selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, arylalkoxy, heteroaryalkoxy, arylthio, heteroarylthio, arylsulfoxy, heteroarylsulfoxy, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, heteroarylsulfonamido, arylaminosulfonyl, heteroarylaminosulfonyl), by substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, carboxamido, sulfonamido, alkoxy, lower-alkylamino, di-lower-alkylamino, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkylalkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, methanesulfonyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkoxy, heterocyclyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl. [00126] In formula (5), each XB 5 through X 8 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, lower akyl, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, cyano, optionally substituted (aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino, arylthio or heteroarylthio, arylsulfinyl or heteroarylsulfinyl, arylsulfonyl or heteroarylsulfonyl), substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono- or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, optionally substituted heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl), nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, honopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, 29 azetidinomethyl, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino or lower alkyl). [00127] In certain embodiments according to formula (5), one of the substituents X 5 through XD 8 is selected from the following: (X')3 HNR20 1 H4 Z-R19 R wherein each w is an integer from 0 to 2; [00128] R 20 is selected from: 30

X

24 through X 2 ' X24 through X 25

X

24 through X1 7 (CH2) R ;(CH2)m~o-C (CHJ> Vv 4 WO 0 \A'o Ala X40 X2 8 through X 31

X

32 through X3 5 X3 through Xs 19 RD RIOR 1/R00 00

X

32 through X 35 X2 through XX through X 39 0 / OH

H

2 2 H 2

C-R

1 2

X

36 2 through X 39

X

24 through X 27 (OH? A4 N R12 (CH2) 10 N/\yC42 N RIO t(H 2 0) R12ylo\NI4\II

X

42 X4 2

(H

2 )u(CH2)t-R'6

'

0 'X4 \ N N A 5 H (CH)u [001291 wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [00130] In fonrula (5), each W1 through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen. [00131} In formula (5), in certain embodiments, each (CH2)q can be optionally substituted with one or more groups selected from hydrogen, halogen, hydoxy, optionally substituted alkoxy, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl and optionally substituted heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, such substituents can be joined to form a cyclic structure. In addition, in certain embodiments, one or more methylene of (CH2)q can 31 be replaced by a heteroatom selected from 0, N and S, where appropriate according to the judgment of one of skidl in the art. [001321 In formula (5), Rt' is aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy. In certain embodiments, R" is 3- or 4-pyridyl. [001331 In formula (5), R7 is heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl. In certain embodiments, R1 2 is 3- or 4- pyridylpropyl. [001341 In formula (5), each X through X" is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido, or carboxamido. [001351 In formula (5), each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Xte is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower aLklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [00136] In formula (5), each A 4 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate,

A

4 is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl anido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [001371 In formula (5), each A 5 independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Where appropriate, A' is optionally substituted with lower alklyl, aryl or heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. 1001381 In formula (5), each RO is selected from: di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalky1, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di-lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl.

32 [00139] Exemplary R1 0 include, but are not limited to, the following: FN -INR14 N \ N S N S=O FNC t F&RR13 R 3 R13 R N A NN N- N-R N -R'4 R7 R17 R FNaN-R14 IN N-R 13N O ell( 17

R

15

(CH

2 )s R 1 7

R

15

'CH

2 ) RRCH2 cis or trans ds or trans cis or trans N- (CH 2 ). N /N--(CH 2 )s 0 R 13 RI/> RN3 >R 1N R R 1

N(H

2 )SYN> N / 1001401 wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [00141] In formula (5), R' is -N-(X") 2 , -COOXY or -CON(X 2

)OX

2 , wherein X4 is as described below. [00142] In formula (5), each X 42 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, all optionally substituted by, for example, hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. Where appropriate, two X 2 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 members, optionally substituted by hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl or heterocycloalkyl. The heteroalkyl ring can have from 0 to 3 heteroatoms. Exemplary heteroalkyl rings include azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino and homopiperazino. [00143] For example, R1 8 can be selected from an optionally substituted nitrogen heterocyclyl, such as piperazinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, homopiperazinyl, 33 thiomorpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl-S-oxide, thiomorpholinyl-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, or azetidinyl. The optional substituent is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl and heterocycloalkyl. [00144] In certain embodiments, each R 18 is independently selected from any of the following: N N-R 1 5 N (CH2)t-R6 \-I-/ N-N N-Ris V(H;2C) d< H --

(CH

2 )U R13 N, H

N-(CH

2 )a

N-(CH

2 )b I I N-(CH2)C H C)H N Nis i 'RIS A15 'R [00145] In formula (5), each R 13 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxymethyl, methoxymethyl or may form a double bond to oxygen (C=O), thus giving the corresponding piperazinone derivative. [00146] In formula (5), each R1 4 is a lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4-pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3 -(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as I-methyl-4-piperidinyl). [001471 In formula (5), each R 15 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, lower cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl-alkyl, heteroalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl or heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl), hydroxy-lower alkyl (such as hydroxyethyl), lower alkylaminoalkyl, lower dialkylaninoalkyl [00148] In formula (5), each R 16 is selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino, N-heterocyclyl (such as azetidino, pyrrolidino, morpholino, piperidino, homopiperidino, piperazino, homopiperazino, thiomorpholino, thoimorpholino-S oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide and their optionally substituted derivatives, where the substituent is selected from lower alkyl, lower hydroxyalkyl or lower alkoxyalkyl).

34 [00149] In formula (4), each R1 7 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [001501 In formula (5), each t is an integer from 0 to 4. [001511 In formula (5), each u is an integer from 0 to 4. [00152] In formula (5), each v is an integer from 0 to 4. [00153] In formula (5), each a is an integer from 0 to 4. [00154] In formula (5), each b is an integer from 0 to 4. 100155] In formula (5), each c is an integer from 0 to 4. [00156] In formula (5), each Z is independently selected from a bond, -(CH 2 )c-, -0-, -S-, -SO-, -SOr- and -N(X")-. [00157] In formula (5), each R' 9 is seleted from: di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloakyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di-lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl. [001581 Exemplary

R'

9 include, but are not limited to, the following: 35 N / -R2 N ON /- FN /\S=O N-, R13 Ri Ri3 Ra R13 FN ) C-NI FN2 N-RCNR2 LN N--R2 R17 R17 R17 ND)N-R21 N JN-R N /-O

R

1 7 R2 (CH 2 ) 0 17 (CH2) - R R2(CH 2 ) cis or trans cis or trans cls or trans I2 N-(CH 2

)

5 0

N-(CH

2 )s NN-C2)T L 13 N-(CH2) N R22 --- R13 R2 --- R2R 1001591 wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [001601 In formula (5), each R 1 is a hydrogen or' lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-metboxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4 pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylakyl (such as a 3.-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as l-methyl-4 piperidinyl). [00161] In formula (5), each R 2 is a hydrogen or lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4 pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as l-methyl-4 piperidinyl). [001621 In formula (5), each R is a hydrogen or lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4 pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as 1-methyl-4 piperidinyl).

36 [001631 In another aspect, the present invention provides compounds according to formula (6), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt or hydrate thereof: Formula 6 F Xcl Xc c XROH 1 -XCE

X

03

X

04 H yc [00164] In formula (6), each WC and Wc 2 is independently a carbon atom or nitrogen atom. When Wcl is N, then XY' is absent and when Wa is N then Xc3 is absent. [00165] The compounds can also be depicted in their respective "keto" form, which under certain conditions may predominate over the corresponding "enol" form. However, all possible tautomers and stereoisomers (such as for example, but not limited to: E and Z, (trans and cis) are incorporated herein. [00166] In formula (6), each Xci through Xc3 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, itro, cyano, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino (substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, optionally substituted heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl), nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide-methyl, thiomorpholino S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino or lower alkyl). [00167] In formula (6), each Xc4 is selected from the following: 37 yC1 OH Y02 NY yo yCE Ye 4 [001681 In formula (6), each YCI through Ya is selected from hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, or trifluoromethanesulfonyl and can form a condensed ring such as methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group. [00169] In formula (6), each Xcs through Xc 7 are independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy. [001701 In formula (6), each Qc is a carbonyl group or a methylene group. [00171] In formula (6), each RC is selected from nitrogen-containing heterocycloalkyl groups, for example, but not limited to: optionally substituted (piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, hexancthyleneiminyl, piperidinyl, pyrrolidinyl or azetidinyl), by a group selected from lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkoxyalkyl, amino, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl or heteroaryl, arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl) by an atom or group selected from hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, cyano, nitro, amino alkylamino or dialkylamino. 1001721 In formula (6), each R 0 can also be selected from a di-lower-alkylamino alkyl group, (such as dimethylaminoethylamino-), heterocyclyl-lower alkylamino (such as I methyl-4-piperazinoethylamino), di-lower-alkylaminoalkoxyalkylamino group (such as 2 diethylaminoethoxyanino), heteroalkylaminoalkylamino group, (such as N-(2 methoxyethyl)-N-ethylaminoethyl-), bis-heteroalkyl-aminoalkylamino group (such as bis-(2 rnethoxyethoxy)-amino-ethylanIino-), or heterocyclylaminoalkylanino groups (such as 1 methyl-4-piperidinylaminoethylamino- or 1-methyl-4-piperazinylethylamino-). Exemplary Re include, but are not limited to, the following: 38 N N-R21 N N\S N V IN R13 Ri13 R 13 13 RU Nw) NN N-R21 LNDN-R21 R 17 Ri N N'W A2 N 0 9 C> ~ ( L17 N N- \ (CH) 22 (CHZ) 8 R 17 cis or trans cis or trans cis or trans I _C28 ' 1 N-(CH2) 1

N-(CH

2 )X -N - R(2)R N-(CH 2 )s>N R R22' N2 ) 2 _' [00173] wherein the independent integers m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v etc. are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. 1001741 In formula (6), each R' 3 is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxymethyl, methoxymethyl or may form a double bond to oxygen (C=0), (thus giving for instance the corresponding piperazinone derivative). [001751 In formula (6), each R 17 is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl. [001761 In formula (6), each R 2 ' is a hydrogen or lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4 pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as 1-methyl- 4 piperidinyl).

39 [00177] In formula (6), each R? is a hydrogen or lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4 pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as 1-methyl-4 piperidinyl). [00178] In formula (6), each RY is a hydrogen or lower alkyl (such as methyl or ethyl), optionally substituted aryl (such as 2-methoxyphenyl) or heteroaryl, (such as 2-,3-,or 4 pyridyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl (such as 4-methoxyphenethyl), or heteroarylalkyl (such as a 3-(4-pyridyl)-propyl), heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl (such as 1-methyl-4 piperidinyl). [00179] In another aspect, the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any of formulas (1) through (6) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent. [00180] In addition to being used as single agents, it is contemplated that compounds of the invention can enhance the activity of cytotoxic or cytostatic treatments when used in combination with standard therapies known in the art. [00181] The invention further provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any of formulas (1) through (6) in combination with pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, excipient or diluent and at least one other anti-cancer agent. [00182] In another aspect, the present invention provides methods of using a compound according to any of formulas (1) through (6) to modulate a tyrosine kinase. The tyrosine kinase can be any tyrosine kinase known to those of skill in the art including, but not limited to, Abl, Alk, CDK's, EGFR, EMT/Itk/Tsk, FGFR, FAK, Flk-I/KDR, HER-2, IGF 1R, IR, Jaki, Jak2, Jak3, Tyk2, LCK, MET, PDGFR and Src. In general, the methods comprise the step of contacting the tyrosine kinase with a sufficient amount of a compound according to any of formulas (1) through (6) to modulate the tyrosine kinase. 100183] In another aspect, the present invention provides methods of using a compound according to any of formulas (1) through (6) to treat or prevent a condition or disorder associated with tyrosine kinase activity. The condition or disorder can be any condition or disorder associated with tyrosine kinase activity including, but not limited to, cancer. psoriasis, hepatic cirrhosis, diabetes, atherosclerosis, angiogenesis, restenosis, ocular diseases, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory disorders, autoimmune diseases and renal disorders. In general, the methods comprise the step of administering to a subject in need 40 thereof an amount of the compound according to any of formulas (1) through (6) effective to treat or prevent the condition or disorder. [00184] In another aspect, the present invention provides methods of using a compound according to any of formulas (1) through (6), in combination with a second agent, to treat or prevent a condition or disorder associated with tyrosine kinase activity. The condition or disorder can be any condition or disorder associated with tyrosine kinase activity including, but not limited to, cancer. psoriasis, hepatic cirrhosis, diabetes, atherosclerosis, angiogenesis, restenosis, ocular diseases, rheumatoid arthritis, inflammatory disorders, autoimmune diseases and renal disorders. In general, the methods comprise the step of administering to a subject in need thereof an amount of the compound according to any of formulas (1) through (6), in combination with the second agent, effective to treat or prevent the condition or disorder. 4. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURE [001851 FIG. I provides the results of an exemplary assay for IGF1R inhibition by a compound of the invention. 5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 5.1 Definitions [00186] When describing the compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods of using such compounds and compositions, the following terms have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. When two terms referring to chemical groups are combined, the combined term refers to the to groups covalently linked in either orientation, unless specified otherwise. For insance, the term "acylamino" can refer to either "-C(O)-N(R)-" or to "--N(R)-C(0)-" unless specified otherwise. [00187] "Acyl" refers to a radical -C(O)R, where R is hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroalkyl, beteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cylcohexylcarbonyl, cyclobexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl, benzylcarbonyl and the like. [001881 "Aliphatic" refers to hydrocarbyl organic compounds or groups characterized by a straight, branched or cyclic arrangement of the constituent carbon atoms and an absence of aromatic unsaturation. Aliphatics include, without limitation, alkyl, alkylene, alkenyl, alkenylene, alkynyl and alkynylene. Aliphatic groups typically have from 1 or 2 to about 12 carbon atoms.

41 [00189] "Alkyl" refers to monovalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups particularly having up to about II carbon atoms, more particularly as a lower alkyl, from 1 to 8 carbon atoms and still more particularly, from 1 to 6 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon chain may be either straight-chained or branched. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, tert-butyl, n-hexyl, n-octyl, tert-octyl and the like. The term "lower alkyl" refers to alkyl groups having I to 6 carbon atoms. The term "alkyl" also includes "cycloalkyl" as defined below. [00190] "Substituted alkyl" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from I to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, heteroaryl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(0) 2 -, and aryl-S(O) 2 -. [00191] "Alkylene" refers to divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbyl groups particularly having up to about 11 carbon atoms and more particularly 1 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2

CH

2 -), the propylene isomers (e.g., -CH 2

CH

2

CH

2 - and CH(CH 3

)CH

2 -) and the like. [00192] "Substituted alkylene" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkylene group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from I to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(Q) 2 - and aryl-S(0) 2 -. [00193] "Alkenyl" refers to monovalent olefmically unsaturated hydrocarbyl groups having up to about 11 carbon atoms, particularly, from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, and more particularly, from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least I and particularly from I to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. Particular alkenyl groups include ethenyl (-CH=CH 2 ), n-propenyl (-CH2CH=CH 2 ), isopropenyl (-C(CH 3

)=CH

2 ), vinyl and substituted vinyl, and the like.

42 [00194] "Substituted alkenyl" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkenyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(O) 2 - and aryl-S(O) 2 -. [00195] "Alkenylene" refers to divalent olefinically unsaturated hydrocarbyl groups particularly having up to about 11 carbon atoms and more particularly 2 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least I and particularly from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene ( CH=CH-), the propenylene isomers (e.g., -CH=CHCr4 2 - and -C(CH 3 )=CH- and CH=C(CH 3 )-) and the like. [001961 "Alkynyl" refers to acetylenically unsaturated hydrocarbyl groups particularly having up to about 11 carbon atoms and more particularly 2 to 6 carbon atoms which can be straight-chained or branched and having at least I and particularly from 1 to 2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation. Particular non-limiting examples of alkynyl groups include acetylenic, ethynyl (-C=CH), propargyl (-CI I 2 C=CH), and the like. [001971 "Substituted alkynyl" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkynyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from I to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(0) 2 - and aryl-S(O) 2 -. [00198] "Alkanoyl" as used herein, which can include "acyl", refers to the group R C(O)-, where R is hydrogen or alkyl as defined above. [00199] "Alkoxy" refers to the group -OR where R is alkyl. Particular alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like. [00200] "Substituted alkoxy" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an alkoxy group having 1 or more substituents, 43 for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, heteroaryl, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(0)2- and aryl-S(O) 2 -. [00201] "Aryl" refers to a monovalent aromatic hydrocarbon group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single carbon atom of a parent aromatic ring system. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexalene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, trinaphthalene and the like. Particularly, an aryl group comprises from 6 to 14 carbon atoms. [002021 "Substituted Aryl" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to an aryl group that may optionally be substituted with I or more substituents, for instance from I to 5 substituents, particularly 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(0)-, alkyl-S(0)2- and aryl-S(0)-. [00203] "Fused Aryl" refers to an aryl having two of its ring carbon in common with a second aryl ring or with an aliphatic ring. In certain embodiments, a bicyclic compund of the invention comprises a fused aryl. [00204] "Amino" refers to the radical -NH 2 . [002051 "Substituted amino" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to the group -N(R) 2 where each R is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, and where both R groups are joined to form an alkylene group. When both R groups are hydrogen, -N(R) 2 is an amino group.

44 [002061 "Azido" refers to the radical -N 3 . [00207] "Carbamoyl" refers to the radical -C(O)N(R) 2 where each R group is independently hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl or aryl, as defined herein, which may be optionally substituted as defined herein. [002081 "Carboxy" refers to the radical -C(O)OH. [002091 "Cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic hydrocarbyl groups having from 3 to about 10 carbon atoms and having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused and bridged ring systems, which optionally can be substituted with from 1 to 3 alkyl groups. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, 1-methylcyclopropyl, 2-methylcyclopentyl, 2-methylcyclooctyl, and the like, and multiple ring structures such as adamantanyl, and the like. [00210] "Substituted cycloalkyl" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to a cycloalkyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(O) 2 - and aryl-S(O)2-. [00211] "Cycloalkoxy" refers to the group -OR where R is cycloalkyl. Such cycloalkoxy groups include, by way of example, cyclopentoxy, cyclohexoxy and the like. [002121 "Cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic hydrocarbyl groups having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms and having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused and bridged ring systems and having at least one and particularly from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. Such cycloalkenyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopropenyl, and the like. [00213] "Substituted cycloalkenyl" includes those groups recited in the definition of "substituted" herein, and particularly refers to a cycloalkenyl group having 1 or more substituents, for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, selected from the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonylamino, aminocarbonyloxy, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, 45 substituted cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxyl, keto, nitro, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thioketo, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(O)2- and aryl-S(O)2-. [00214] "Fused Cycloalkenyl" refers to a cycloalkenyl having two of its ring carbon atoms in common with a second aliphatic or aromatic ring and having its olefinic unsaturation located to impart aromaticity to the cycloalkenyl ring. [00215] "Cyanato" refers to the radical -OCN. [00216] "Cyano" refers to the radical -CN. [002171 "Dialkylamino" means a radical -NRR' where R and R' independently represent an alkyl, substituted alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, cycloalkyl, substituted cycloalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, substituted cycloheteroalkyl, heteroaryl, or substituted heteroaryl group as defined herein. [00218] "Ethenyl" refers to substituted or unsubstituted -(C=C)-. [00219] "Ethylene" refers to substituted or unsubstituted -(C-C)-. [00220] "Ethynyl" refers to -(CEC)- [00221] "Halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo. Particular halo groups are either fluoro or chloro. [00222] "Hydroxy" refers to the radical -OH. [00223] "Nitro" refers to the radical -NO 2 . [00224] "Hetero" when used to describe a compound or a group present on a compound means that one or more carbon atoms in the compound or group have been replaced by a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatom. Hetero may be applied to any of the hydrocarbyl groups described above such as alkyl, e.g. heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, e.g. cycloheteroalkyl, aryl, e.g. heteroaryl, cycloalkenyl, cycloheteroalkenyl, and the like having from 1 to 5, and especially from 1 to 3 heteroatoms. [00225] "Heteroaryl" or "heteroaromatic"refers to a monovalent heteroaromatic group derived by the removal of one hydrogen atom from a single atom of a parent heteroaromatic ring system. Typical heteroaryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from acridine, arsindole, carbazole, p-carboline, chromane, chromene, cinnoline, furan, imidazole, indazole, indole, indoline, indolizine, isobenzofuran, isochromene, isoindole, isoindoline, isoquinoline, tetrahydroisoquinoline, isothiazole, isoxazole, naphthyridine, oxadiazole, oxazole, perimidine, phenanthridine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phthalazine, pteridine, purine, pyran, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine, pyrrole, pyrrolizine, quinazoline, quinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, quinolizine, quinoxaline, tetrazole, thiadiazole, 46 thiazole, thiophene, triazole, xanthene, and the like. Particularly, heteroaryl can include other saturated ring systems, and can therefore be derived from indoline, indolizine, tetrahydroquinoline, and tetrahydroisoquinoline. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is between 5-20 membered heteroaryl, with 5-10 membered heteroaryl being useful in certain embodiments. Particular heteroaryl groups are those derived from thiophene, pyrrole, benzothiophene, benzofuran, indole, pyridine, pyrimidine, quinoline, tetrahydroquinoline, isoquinoline, tetrahydroisoquinoline, imidazole, oxazole and pyrazine. [00226] As used herein, the term "cycloheteroalkyl" refers to a stable heterocyclic non aromatic ring and fused rings containing one or more heteroatoms independently selected from N, 0 and S. A fused heterocyclic ring system may include carbocyclic rings and need only include one heterocyclic ring. Examples of heterocyclic rings include, but are not limited to, piperazinyl, homopiperazinyl, piperidinyl and morpholinyl. 100227] "Sulfanyl" refers to the radical HS-. "Substituted sulfanyl" refers to a radical such as RS- wherein R is any substituent described herein. In certain embodiments, "substituted sulfanyl" refers to a radical -SR where R is an alkyl or cycloalkyl group as defined herein that may be optionally substituted as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, methylthio, ethylthio, propylthio, butylthio, and the like. [00228] "Sulfinyl" refers to the radical -S(0)1. "Substituted sulfinyl" refers to a radical such as S(O)-R wherein R is any substituent described herein. [00229] "Sulfonyl" refers to the divalent radical -S(0 2 )-. "Substituted sulfonyl" refers to a radical such as -S(0 2 )-R wherein R is any substituent described herein. "Aminosulfonyl" or "Sulfonamide" refers to the radical H 2 N(0 2 )S-, and "substituted aminosulfonyl" "substituted sulfonamide" refers to a radical such as R 2 N(0 2 )S- wherein each R is independently any substituent described herein. In particular embodiments, R is selected from H, lower alkyl, alkyl, aryl and heteroaryl. [00230] One having ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis will recognize that the maximum number of heteroatoms in a stable, chemically feasible heterocyclic ring, whether it is aromatic or non aromatic, is determined by the size of the ring, the degree of unsaturation and the valence of the heteroatoms. In general, a heterocyclic ring may have one to four heteroatoms so long as the heteroaromatic ring is chemically feasible and stable. [00231] "Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to any salt of a compound of this invention which retains its biological properties and which is not toxic or otherwise undesirable for pharmaceutical use. Such salts may be derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter-ions well known in the art and include. Such salts include: (1) acid 47 addition salts formed with organic or inorganic acids such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulfuric, nitric, phosphoric, sulfamic, acetic, trifluoroacetic, trichloroacetic, propionic, hexanoic, cyclopentylprOPiOnic, glycolic, glutaric, pyruvic, lactic, malonic, succinic, sorbic, ascorbic, malic, maleic, fumaric, tartaric, citric, benzoic, 3-(4-hydroxybnzoyl)benzoic, picric, cinnamic, mandelic, phthalic, lauric, methanesulfonic, ethanesulfonic, 1,2-ethane disulfonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic, benzenesulfonic, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic, 2 naphthaenesulfonic, 4-toluenesulfonic, camphoric, camphorsulfonic, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2] oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic, glucoheptonic, 3-phenylpropionic, trimethylacetic, tert-butylacetic, lauryl sulfuric, gluconic, benzoic, glutamic, hydroxynaphthoic, salicylic, stearic, cyclohexylsulfamic, quinic, muconic acid and the like acids; or (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either (a) is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion or an aluminum ion, or alkali metal or alkaline earth metal hydroxides, such as sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, aluminum, lithium, zinc, and barium hydroxide, ammonia or (b) coordinates with an organic base, such as aliphatic, alicyclic, or aromatic organic amines, such as ammonia, methylamine, dimethylamine, diethylamine, picoline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, ethylenediamine, lysine, arginine, ornitbine, choline, NN'-dibenzylethylene-diamine, chloroprocaine, diethanolamine, procaine, N-benzylphenethylamine, N-methylglucamnine piperazine, tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and the like. [00232] Salts ftuther include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylanmonium and the like, and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non-toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, besylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like. The term "physiologically acceptable cation" refers to a non-toxic, physiologically acceptable cationic counterion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium and tetraalkylammonium cations and the like. 1002331 "Solvate" refers to a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of solvent bound by non covalent intermolecular forces. Where the solvent is water, the solvate is a hydrate. [002341 It is to be understood that compounds having the same molecular formula but differing in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed "isomers". Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed "stereoisomers".

48 [00235] Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed "diastereomers" and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed "enantiomers". When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, when it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible. An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is designated (R) or (S) according to the rules of Cahn and Prelog (Cahn et al., 1966, Angew. Chem. 78:413-447, Angew. Chem., Int. Ed Engl. 5:385-414 (errata: Angew. Chem., Int. Ed Engl. 5:511); Prelog and Helmchen, 1982, Angew. Chem. 94:614-631, Angew. Chen. Internal. Ed Eng. 21:567 583; Mata and Lobo, 1993, Tetrahedron: Asynntary 4:657-668) or can be characterized by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and is designated dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+)- or (-)-isomers, respectively). A chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of enantiomers is called a "racemic mixture". [00236] In certain embodiments, the compounds of this invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers; such compounds can therefore be produced as the individual (R) or (S)-enantiomer or as a mixture thereof Unless indicated otherwise, for example by designation of stereochemistry at any position of a formula, the description or naming of a particular compound in the specification and claims is intended to include both individual enantiomers and mixtures, racemic or otherwise, thereof Methods for determination of stereochemistry and separation of stereoisomers are well-known in the art. In particular embodiments, the present invention provides the stereoisomers of the compounds depicted herein upon treatment with base. [00237] In certain embodiments, the compounds of the invention are "stereochemically pure." A stereochemically pure compound has a level of stereochemical purity that would be recognized as "pure" by those of skill in the art. Of course, this level of purity will be less than 100%. In certain embodiments, "stereochemically pure" designates a compound that is substantially free of alternate isomers. In particular embodiments, the compound is 85%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99%, 99.5% or 99.9% free of other isomers. [00238] As used herein, the terms "disorder" and "disease" are used interchangeably to refer to a condition in a subject. Certain conditions may be characterized as more than one disorder. For example, certain conditions may be characterized as both non-cancerous proliferative disorders and inflammatory disorders.

49 [00239] As used herein, the term "effective amount" refers to the amount of a compound of the invention which is sufficient to reduce or ameliorate the severity, duration of a disorder, cause regression of a disorder, prevent the recurrence, development, or onset of one or more symptoms associated with a disorder, or enhance or improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect(s) of another therapy. [002401 As used herein, the term "in combination" refers to the use of more than one therapies. The use of the term "in combination" does not restrict the order in which therapies (e.g., prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents) are administered to a subject with a disorder. A first therapy can be administered prior to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, I week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks before), concomitantly with, or subsequent to (e.g., 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 72 hours, 96 hours, I week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 4 weeks, 5 weeks, 6 weeks, 8 weeks, or 12 weeks after) the administration of a second therapy to a subject with a disorder. [00241] As used herein, the terms "prophylactic agent" and "prophylactic agents" as used refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the prevention of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. In certain embodiments, the term "prophylactic agent" refers to a compound of the invention. In certain other embodiments, the term "prophylactic agent" does not refer a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, a prophylactic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used to the prevent or impede the onset, development, progression and/or severity of a disorder. Prophylactic agents may be characterized as different agents based upon one or more effects that the agents have in vitro and/or in vivo. For example, an anti-angiogenic agent may also be characterized as an immunomodulatory agent. [00242] As used herein, the terms "prevent," " preventing" and "prevention" refer to the prevention of the recurrence, onset, or development of one or more symptoms of a disorder in a subject resulting from the administration of a therapy, or the administration of a combination of therapies. [00243] As used herein, the phrase "prophylactically effective amount" refers to the amount of a therapy which is sufficient to result in the prevention of the development, recurrence or onset of one or more symptoms associated with a disorder, or to enhance or improve the prophylactic effect(s) of another therapy.

50 [002441 As used herein, the terms "subject" and "patient" are used interchangeably herein. The terms "subject" and "subjects" refer to an animal, in certain embodiments a mammal including a non-primate (e.g., a cow, pig, horse, cat dog, rat, and mouse) and a primate (e.g., a monkey such as a cynomolgous monkey, a chimpanzee and a human), and more particularly a human. In another embodiment, the subject is a farm animal (e.g., a horse, a cow, a pig, etc.) or a pet (e.g., a dog or a cat). In certain embodiments, the subject is a human. [00245] As used herein, the term "synergistic" refers to a combination of a compound of the invention and another therapy which has been or is currently being used to prevent, manage or treat a disorder, which is more effective than the additive effects of the therapies. A synergistic effect of a combination of therapies permits the use of lower dosages of one or more of the therapies and/or less frequent administration of said therapies to a subject with a disorder. The ability to utilize lower dosages of a therapy and/or to administer said therapy less frequently reduces the toxicity associated with the administration of said therapy to a subject without reducing the efficacy of said therapy in the prevention, management or treatment of a disorder. In addition, a synergistic effect can result in improved efficacy of agents in the prevention, management or treatment of a disorder. Finally, a synergistic effect of a combination of therapies may avoid or reduce adverse or unwanted side effects associated with the use of either therapy alone. [00246] As used herein, the terms "therapeutic agent" and "therapeutic agents" refer to any agent(s) which can be used in the treatment, management, or amelioration of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof In certain embodiments, the term "therapeutic agent" refers to a compound of the invention. In certain other embodiments, the term "therapeutic agent" refers does not refer to a compound of the invention. In certain embodiments, a therapeutic agent is an agent which is known to be useful for, or has been or is currently being used for the treatment, management, prevention, or amelioration a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. Therapeutic agents may be characterized as different agents based upon one or more effects the agents have in vivo and/or in vitro, for example, an anti inflammatory agent may also be characterized as an immunomodulatory agent. [00247] As used herein, the term "therapeutically effective amount" refers to that amount of a therapy sufficient to result in the amelioration of one or more symptoms of a disorder, prevent advancement of a disorder, cause regression of a disorder, or to enhance or improve the therapeutic effect(s) of another therapy. In a specific embodiment, with respect to the treatment of cancer, an effective amount refers to the amount of a therapy that inhibits 51 or reduces the proliferation of cancerous cells, inhibits or reduces the spread of tumor cells (metastasis), inhibits or reduces the onset, development or progression of one or more symptoms associated with cancer, or reduces the size of a tumor. In certain embodiments, a therapeutically effective of a therapy reduces the proliferation of cancerous cells or the size of a tumor by at least 5%, at least 10%, at least 15%, at least 20%, at least 25%, at least 30%, at least 35%, at least 40%, at least 45%, at least 50%, at least 55%, at least 60%, at least 65%, at least 70%, at least 75%, at least 80%, at least 85%, at least 90%, at least 95%, or at least 99%, relative to a control or placebo such as phosphate buffered saline ("PBS"). [00248] As used herein, the terms "therapies" and "therapy" can refer to any protocol(s), method(s), and/or agent(s) that can be used in the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof. In certain embodiments, the terms "therapy" and "therapies" refer to chemotherapy, radiation therapy, hormonal therapy, biological therapy, and/or other therapies useful in the prevention, management, treatment or amelioration of a disorderor one or more symptoms thereof known to one of skill in the art (e.g., skilled medical personnel). 1002491 As used herein, the terms "treat", "treatment" and "treating" refer to the reduction or amelioration of the progression, severity and/or duration of a disorder, or the amelioration of one or more symptoms thereof resulting from the administration of one or more therapies. 5.2 Embodiments of the Invention 5.2.1 Formula (1) 5.2.1.1 Compounds [00250] Exemplary compounds according to formula (1) include, but are not limited to, those of formulas (la) (1-30): 52 Formula (Ia) 1 through 30 RL R' N-- RL -R R ~ g~PL~~ -RKi RKI RK1 RK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 R' RL R ' LN RLI rN 22 R L 8 pKIK RKlbKjRK R RK RKI RRljIK NRKR1 1 K1 R 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RL RL IRL N NN N'R RK1 Ri 17 i 19 20 21 22 [251 Inform l ( 0,i RL N loe a RL RKI c aRKI k l ( p 23 24 25 26 27 28 RNR R N % R 29 s [002511 in formulas (I a) (1 -30), each el 1 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl (such as ally or niethallyl), lower alkynyl (such as propargyl or 3 pentynyl), lower cycloalkyl (such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl or cyclopentyl), lower cycloalkyl-alkyl (such as cyclopropylmethyl or cyclopropylethyl), optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, 53 heteroalkyl (such as 2-methoxyethyl, 2-methoxypropyl, diethylaminoethyl or 3 dimethylaminopropyl), heterocycloalkyl (such as 3-tetrahydrofurfuryl or 3-piperidinyl), heterocycloalkyl-alkyl (such as tetrahydrofurfuryl or 2-( 2 -(l-rnethylpyrrolidino)-ethyl))). [00252] In formulas (la) (1-30), each RL is independently selected from the following:

X

24 through X 27 X24 through X 25 H V' HN A W

(CH

2 )m M 1 AI 1 (CH2)

M

1 o X

X

24 through

X

27 (X41)3 I I NNZ$ M Z M2 Z2A [00253] In formulas (la) (1-30), each Z' and Z 2 is independently selected from: a chemical bond or (CH 2 )r, wherein r is an integer from 0 to 6, or -(CF 2 )-(C=O)- or -(CF 2

)

(CH

2 )-. Any of the methylene groups can be optionally substituted by one or more lower alkyl group(s), including substitution, forming geminal dialkyl, such as geminal dimethyl. They can be also optionally substituted by an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a hydroxy or lower alkoxy group. Optionally one or more of the methylene group(s) can be replaced by a heteroatom selected from -0-, -S-, -SO-, -SO2- and -N(X )-. Any one of the methylene group(s) can also be in the oxidation state of a carbonyl (keto-) group. X41 is as described for formula (1) above. [00254] In formulas (I a) (1-30), each M', M', A', W' through W 5 , X 24 through X27, X40, m and T' is as described for formula (1), above. [00255] Further exemplary compounds of formula (1) include, but are not limited to, those of formulas (1b) (1 through 9): 54 Formulas (1b) RL RL RL RL N N N ' RKI Ki RKKl K 1 2 3 4 RL NRL RL RL RK1 RKI RK1 K 6 7 8 [00256] In formulas (lb) (1-30), each R"" is independently selected from hydrogen or lower alkyl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl. [002571 In formulas (Ia) (1-30), each RL is independently selected from the following:

X

24 through

X

27 (R4)3 ' HN ZN M' 0 [00258] Z and independently Z 2 are selected from: a chemical bond or (CH 2 )r, wherein r is an integer from 0 to 6, or -(CF 2 )-(C=0)- or -(CF 2

)-(CH

2 )-. Any of the methylene groups can be optionally substituted by one or more lower alkyl group(s), including substitution, forming geminal dialkyl, such as geminal dimethyL They can be also optionally substituted by an optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl group or a hydroxy or lower alkoxy group. Optionally one or more of the methylene group(s) can be replaced by a heteroatom selected from -0--, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 - and -N(X4")-. Any one of the methylene group(s) can also be in the oxidation state of a carbonyl (keto-) group. X 4 ' is as described for formula (1) above.

5s [00259] In formulas (la) (1-30), each M', M 2 , A', W' through W', X 2 4 through X", X, and TI is as described for formula (1), above. {0D260] In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: R 41 93Q1'N..RK1 41 0 R4 Q3

R

4 1 R 41

R

4 o NQ 4 2 R4N N I N' :' N R1

R

41

R

41

R

41 H 4 [00261] In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: Q1- N RK1

R

41

R

41 N N N - N R H [00262] In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: R1 Q1'N'RK1 QtNR R41 Q3 02

R

41

RD

41 R 41 0 . N-.

04 4 N RR1 R H 4H [00263] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: 56

R

41

R

4 1 0 N- 4 R41 N N

R

41

R

41 H [002641 In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: Qf-NRK1 R41R 41

R

4 1 Q

RNR

4

R

4 1

R

41 H R4 [00265] In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: R 41 R 41QQ1-N'RK1

R

4 R R4 41 /H

R

4 1

R

41 H [00266] In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: R 41 Q Q .R K1 R41 0 ZN-Q4

R

4 R .N--N He T' [00267] In further embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: 57 R'N'Ri N-iNH T' 100268] In finther embodiments, the present invention provide compounds according to the following: 41 Q 2

R

4 1 o

N-

0 4 R41 N N-N H R Ti 1002691 In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: Q1-NR[MK N- 0 4 Q R4 H N-N Ti [002701 Exemplary embodiments of formulas (1), (la) and (Ib) include, but are not limited to, the specific examples shown below: OH 0JF1O HH KNr H - N H N 0 N-N OH o N1OH 0 N]" N NN'Z .1 ~NO ~ I H H - N - N e OH A x NQ' H\ NN NN \ N ::-< I C H 'I H

-

N P -J N NS H- H N F OH0Ha N N NNL/O N OH eH H 0 OC~ \\~N N% N N N - N N H 1 H H - N xDC N HH NN OH OQ hF OH0 0 H 59 OHOH OH N N N NumNO H H 1 H N NN6~ N 0N ' N NI NE NH Hfj OHm

N

4 j " NHNH N N "O -,') -~ " ~OH NHH NH NHH OH)- 'OH N"'OH - N N N NH H NHHH H 'OH IOH OH N OHND Na N OH OH - N "" N NH H NH H NH H' -'OH .'OH -"OH CIl 60 OH OH OH N~ N(rNEa / \NC N- N N,\ N,(:yNO/' N N H H-> O N .N NN > N OH OH OH "O N4 N. NDI NH I NH NNH NN OHOH NO N N qNNEPOH HO NHNH H -H H N.0 -'H NI-10 N OH NOH "' : NOH yC I/ N8 61 OH N OH OH N rN H H O N N F OH OH OH N NC O N H NQ N:Co /P : o-c<N N H OH /OH NIII"m OH- NCIr /-< s<, H 0 H2j) jNp 20 N, NH fJ2b 0 2 W ~(NU

N/

1 N H' 24 N H , N N~ 4 -\H' N No N N < ~N dN 63 N N N' N N' N N C N N NH N N NNH NN -" /a - ' Y N H 2 N N

H

2 N 0 N0 ,1IJ NI I H N- N N O Ib N- \N

IN

H2N

H

2 N 0 N 2 N 0N Oj" NN 'N /O 0 - S 0 5.2.1.2 Preparation of Compounds According to Formula (1) [002711 Compounds according to formula (1), (la) and (lb) can be prepared according to any method apparent to those of skill in the art. The present invention provides the following exemplary methods for their preparation. [00272] In certain embodiments, a useful reaction sequence includes treating the corresponding spiro-precursors with an alkylating or arylating (or heteroarylating) agent. The second nitrogen of the corresponding spiro-precursor is either a tertiary nirogen, or if a secondary nitrogent is desired, a protecting group can be used, such as for example, but not limited to: BOC, CBZ, trifluoroacetyl, benzyl and the like. Their removal can be performed according to procedures well-known in the art. [00273] Certain of the starting spiro-compounds are either commercial reagents, or are prepared according to literature, or otherwise known methodologies.

64 [00274] Scheme 1-1 depicts the general methodology used for the sythesis of compounds of formula (1). Scheme 1-1 02NF F 1 QNORNN N-R 2- or 4- isomers RQ / N-R x 2- or 4- isomers 0 2 N y r / solvent/ base / heat 0 2 N _ Q N< N-Ra 0 2 N Br Q2 Q4 Q1- 04 are as defined above 0 2 N Rr is H, Rr2 is a substituent or a protecting group 2 UN-Rr2 selected from BOC, CBZ or trifluoroacetyl -Q2 X 4 1002751 The solvent is selected from DMF, DMA, THF, DME, N-methyl pyrrolidone, toluene, xylene, acetonitrile, anisole, diglyme, chlorobenzene and the like, including a mixture of two or more solvents. Optionally water may be used as a co-solvent. The base is selected from diisopropylethylamine, triethylamine, potassium carbonate, potassium phosphate, cesium carbonate, DBN or DBU, NaOH, KOI, Ca(OH)2 and the like. The solution of the alkylating agent in the above solvent is treated with an equivalent amount of the optionally protected spirodiamine and excess of base and the mixture is stirred at a temperature between 20*C to 120*C, in certain embodiments at 30-60*C. The reaction mixture is checked for progress of the reaction by LC/MS or by TLC and when substantially complete is concentrated down under vacuo and purified by futher extraction and optionally column chromatography. [00276] Alternatively, methods can be used that do not provide a limitation on the position of introduction of the spiro-moiety. Thus the iodo- or bromo- aniline derivatives can be reacted with the spiro-derivative using various palladium, or copper catalysts, such as conditions generally referred to as Buchwald reaction and others known in the art. f00277] Scheme 2 depicts the use of a palladium, or copper-catalyzed reaction: g65 Scheme 1-2 R1' N -Q or Br Zr 2 N ( 2 4<-R solvent / base / heat Q Q Cul or Pd 0 catalyst Zr1 NH2, NHBOC, N02 01- Q4 are as defined above Rr1 is H, Rr2 is a substituent or a protecting group selected from BOC, CBZ or trifluoroacetyl [00278] In certain embodiments, conditions include the use of the iodo-derivative, CuI, potassium phosphate as a base in isopropyl alcohol, containing catalytic amount of ethylene glycol. The reaction using palladium catalyst, which is selected from tetrakis triphenylphosphinc palladium, palladium dibenzylidene acetone, palladium acetate, or palladium chloride in the optional presence of a phosphine ligand compound such as triphenylphosphine, tri-o-tolylphosphine, XANTPHOS, bis diphenylphosphino ferrocene and the like is conducted in a solvent, such as toluene, THF, DMF, DMA, or dimethoxyethane under argon, in the presence of a base, such as cesium carbonate, potassium phosphate, KOtBu, NaOtBu and the like. [00279] The secondary amino-group of the spiro-compounds can be reacted with reactive precursors, such as the corresponding isocyanates, acid chlorides, sulfonyl chlorides, epoxides, bromoketones and the like to provide the corresponding precursors for the compounds of formula 1, ureas, amides, sulfonamides, amino alcohols, aminoketones and the like. The methodology is generally well-known in the field. [002801 The nitro-group is reduced by catalytic hydrogenation over palladium or Raney nickel, or is effected by any reagent suitable for this reduction, including stannous chloride, titanium III chloride solution, Zn/AcOH, Fe/AcOH and the like. The solvents for this reduction include, but are not limited to: THF, MeOH, EtOH, H20, dioxane, AcOH and the like. The workup includes concentration of the reaction mixture in vacuum and optional basification, extraction and concentration. The products can be purified by column chromatography, or converted to stable salts, such as the hydrochloride. [00281] The so-obtained amines are used in the coupling reactions with the corresponding carboxylic acids, using any of the multitude coupling reagents known in the 66 art. Optionally the amide coupling may be performed using the methyl ester of the corresponding acid and trimethyl aluminum, so-called Weinreb conditions. [00282] Exemplary compounds and methods of their preparation are provided in the examples below. 5.2.2 Formula (2) 5.2.2.1 Compounds According to Formula (2) [00283] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (2) that are represented in formulas (2a) A and B: Formulas (2a) A and B X4 X4 x I~& NH 2 x Ikx

W

5 W W, N W5 WW N ~ / R2 x ~I r R 2 i 2 .4 2

NH

2 R4 R4 A a [00284] In formulas (2a) A and B, each X' through 3, R', R2, R3, R4, RW, R, R7, W' and W 2 is as described for formula (2), above. [002851 In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: yX4 5NH 2 X2 X2 N-" AI N-f X1 W 1 N_ R 2 W N\ R XIR - NH 2 R4 R4 A B [00286] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: 67 X3 N X 5 N-H2 X N 2 N N/ R 2 X2 N X1 X'RS -N NH 2 R4 R4 A B [00287] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following:

X

4 X 5 X3 X5 N H2 X2 W X2 H

AW

2 RXRS -W 2

NH

2

R

20 R4 R4 A B [00288] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: XX4 5 N HX3X4 N N N H x2 Y NN H2 NHiN R5 - N R X -N NH 2 R' R4 R4 A B [00289] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: 68 NHN X2 VV 1 N/2 R5 R -W2 NH 2 R4 R4 A B [00290] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: X4 NH 2

X

4 X N X N N 0 .- N2NN N XIRS -N XIRS -N NH 2 R4 R4 A B [00291] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: X3X4 - NH23X4 6 X N- 0 N 0 X2 W X2 NH-1N'/ Wy-

W

1 N/? x2 NH1,NHx2 R -W 2 N NH X R W 2

NH

2 N NH R4 X 20 X23 R 4 A X 2 1 X 22 B X2 [002921 In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: 69

NH

2 X3 X5 N N0 X N- 0 /I yN N N NH XR5 N N NH X1R5 -N NH 2 N X23 R4 X20 y0-23 R4 ) A X 2 1 X22 B X2 [00293] Exemplary compounds according to formula (2) are described in the examples below. 5.2.2.2 Preparation of Compounds According to Formula (2) [00294] Compounds according to formula (2) and (2a) can be prepared according to any method apparent to those of skill in the art. The present invention provides the following exemplary methods for their preparation. [002951 In certain embodiments, compounds of fonnula (2) are prepared according to the following procedures, according to scheme 2-1: 70 Scheme 2-1 0 B(OH)2 O NH 2 N N N N N CI NNCl Pd[P(Ph) 3

]

4 N Cs 2

CO

3 / DMF Na 2

CO

3 o 0 O NH 2 NR+ H2N NN Separation N N N N Column chromatography KOH/MeOH then acidify O 0 HO NH 2 HO N N H 2 N N NN N HBTU ID IPEA R*-NH2 O 0 if H NN

H

2 N N R, HN) NH2 RHN N J, N N ,N N N N N N

N

71 1002961 Exemplary compounds according to formula (2) and methods for their perparation are described in detail in the examples below. 5.2.3 Formula (3) 5.2.3.1 Compounds According to Formula (3) [00297] In certain embodiments, the prseent invention provides compounds according to formula (3) that are represented in formulas (3a) A and B: Formulas (3a) A and B X2 X4 N- 2 X2 3 X4 NH:; N - RN N -R2 x1 NyN/ Y -N Y -N NH 2

R

5

R

6 R4 R 5

R

6 R4 A B 100298] In formulas (3a) A and B, X' through X4, R', R2, R3, R, RR and Y are as described for formula (3), above. [002991 In certain embodiments, the prseent invention provides compounds according to formula (3) that are represented in formulas (3b) A and B Formulas (3h) A and B

X

3 X X2 X x 4 N- NH 2 X2 N X1 N R2 1 N R 2 -N Y -N NH 2

R

5 R6R4 R R6 R4 A B [00300] In formulas (3b) A and B, X1 through X, R', R, R4, RW, R 6 and Y are as described for formula (3), above. [00301] In formulas (3b) A and B, R2 is selected from the following: 72

X

2 0 kNR20 X2 Ri 0H X23 1003021 In formulas (3b) A and B, R 20 is selected from hydrogen, C 1 14 alkyl, C 2

.

14 alkenyl, C 2

-

14 alkynyl, C 3

-

14 cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, all groups may be optionally substituted by a substituent selected from hydroxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, hereocycloalkyl. In formulas (3b) A and B, R 20 can also be selected from the following:

X

24 through X 27

X

3 6 through X 39 (CH)m O 1 (CH26 X(OH2)q [00303] wherein the independent integers m, p and q are from 0 to 6, in certain embodiments from 0 to 3. [003041 In formulas (3b) A and B, X 24 through X 39 , R", R' and R 8 are as described for formula (3), above. [00305] In formulas (3b) A and B, each X 0 0 through X 23 is independently selected from: hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiornorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide methyl, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino and also the following: 73 (CH2)mN N-R 14 R13 [00306] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: X N-X4 N- 0 X N X2 Y 3 x4 XH2 X R3 I1N N 1 V .N V rN NH 2

R

5 R R4 R RG R4 A B [00307] [n further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following:

X

3

NH

2 X N- X4N N- 0 N N Ny N N -N NH 2 RSRR4 R RR4 A B 1003081 In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: NHN XN N N ~ N NH 2 A a [00309] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: 74

X

3 X3 Xx X4N X2 X4N N 2 N N N - 0 x 1 ; NNN H - y N N H N 2Y -N NH 2 R2o

R

5 RB R4 R R6 R4 A B [003101 In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: N 3X N- NH 2 2 N- x 0 N; (0 XNH NH N R -N NH 2

R

20

R

5 RB R4 R RR4 A B [00311] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: x 2

-NH

2 KN N/X NN/ 20NH YNH X 2N

NH

2 20 A B [00312] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: X2 x3X4 N- NH2 O2X3X N $ NH N X1 N N N N/ Y -N N NH y N NH2 N 23 RS R R4 X 20 23 R 5 RR4 A X 22

X

22 B 22 75 [00313] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following:

X

3

X

3 X2 X 4 N NH2 X2 X X4 N 0 N N N - 2 N NH -N N NH -N NH2 X23

R

5 RBR4 X 20 \ X23 R 5 RG R4 X20 N' X20 x 22 A X 2 2

X

2 a [00314] In further embodiments, the present invention provides compounds according to the following: N- NH 2 0 A N/ - N N U N NH / NH N 2-X3N NH 2 N x23 X20 X22 A X22 22 B x2 [00315] The following exemplary compounds according to formula (3) were prepared according to the methods described herein: MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 429.5 420.5 539.7 497.6 76 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 511.6 539.7 498.6 526.6 456.5 500.6 500.6 514.6 542.6 539.7 477.6 540.6 77 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 541.6 511.6 483.5 F503.6 50RO4.6 510.6 569.7 -456.5 556.6 456.5 56.8 78 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 525.6 567.7 541.6 497.6 588.7 529.6 5q 472.5 555.7 458.5 554.6 452.5 480.5 79 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 467.5 431.5 445.5 525.6 450.6 506.7 478.6 434.5 434.5 434.5 555.7 569.7 80 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 538.6 442.5 442.5 442.5 458.5 556.7 569.7 477.6 562.4 518.0 485.5 625.7 81 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 414.4 553.7 507.6 553.7 499.6 420.5 612.7 551.7 N 525.6 539.7 558.6 639.8 82 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 603.7 64 484.5 483.5 562.1 512.6 539.7 592.7 592.7 557.6 588.7 602.7 602.7 83 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 548.6 548.6 --- 588 7 596.8 606.7 526.6 565.7 621.8 582.7 612.7 625.7 525.6 84 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+i) 553.7 r 539.7 555.7 0 553.7 Hl 508.6 5.2.3.2 Preparation of Compounds According to Formula (3) [00316] Compounds according to formula (3), (3a) and (3b) can be prepared according to any method apparent to those of skill in the art. The present invention provides the following exemplary methods for their preparation. [00317] Compounds of formula (3) were prepared according to the following general schemes. Scheme 3-1 OH 0 N N 0o- t 85 Scheme 3-2 0 It -- OH 0 OH cl R 0 urea, MeOH N N N H O tPOl A H{-<OEt X A OEt PO C 1 O OH R a OMe N N .NEO yR /~( urea NaOEt HCq D B A thlourea O S NaOEtANN EtON N N NMCPN MIMCPBAI Me & k 0CM 1 x x E F [003181 As shown in SCHEME 1 the respective ketones A can be reacted with urea, trialkylorthofonnate such as trimethyl or triethylorthoformate for example to afford respective compound B. Reaction of compound B with POC13 either neat or with a cosolvent, for example toluene or dichlorobenzene, with or without the addition of PC15 affords the respective compound C. Alternatively Compound A may be reacted with dimethylformamide dimethyl acetal for example to give intermediate D. Reaction of intermediate D with urea, sodium alkoxide for example NaOMe or NaOEt in a solvent such as ethanol affords respective compound B as the sodium salt which is neutralized with dilute acid to give B. Reaction of intermediate D with thiourea as above followed by reaction with methyl iodide affords intermediate E which is oxidized using an oxidant for example metachloro perbenzoic acid in a solvent such as dichloromethane give compound F.

86 SCHEME 3-3 CI I. EtO NJ N NH2 H 2 N E 0 EtC N ~ N. \G:Dt N OEt H2N ON N C N N N N N NDMF, CsCO 3 NJ N G H F OEt

H

2

N-NH

2 EtO H HN-NH2 N N EtOH, HOAc [00319] Compound C or D from SCHEME 1 may be reacted with an aminopyrazole in a solvent such as DMF with a base like cesium carbonate to afford an approximate 7:3 mixture of compounds G and H. These may be separately isolated via crystallization or chromatograpy or trituration with solvents such as ethyl acetate or ethanol. Alternatively compound H may be prepared by reaction of compound C or D with hydrazine in an alcohol to afford intermediate I which can then be reacted with compound J, prepared from reaction of the cyano acetate and DMFDMA, in a solvent like ethanol and an acid like acetic acid to give compound H.

87 SCHEME 3 EtO HO

H

2 N 0 H 2 N o RHN N

H

2 N O N N N INKOH N NH2R N MeOH K HBTU DMF M EtO HO 0 ,5D~nN':

DNRHN

H

2 N N H2N N N N N NJ"N

H

2 N N' H X L N N [003201 Compounds G and H may separately be treated with a hydroxide source such as aqueous potassium hydroxide and methanol to yield the respective acids K and L. Acids K and L may separately be treated in a solvent such as DMF and an organic base such as DIPEA with a coupling agent such as HBTU or BOP for example to yield aides M and N. [003211 Exemplary compounds according to formula (3) and methods of their preparation are described in detail in the examples below. 5.2.4 Compounds According to Formula (4): [003221 In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (4) that are represented in formula (4a): Formula (4a) XAI XA5 XA XA XA3 N N XAI A4 XA8 1003231 The compounds can also be depicted in their respective "keto" form, which under certain conditions may predominate over the corresponding "enol" form. However, all 88 possible tautomers and stereoisomers (such as for example, but not limited to: E and Z, (trans and cis) are incorporated herein. [00324] In formula 4a, XA1 though X^ 4 are as described in formula (4), above. [00325] In formula 4a, each XAS through XAS is independently selected is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino (substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl anido, heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl), nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinomethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide-methyl, thiomorpholino S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl), all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino and also the following: 0 0 HN-R20 R [00326] In formula 4a, R? is selected from:

X

24 through X 27

X

36 through X 3 9 (ItCH 2 )m O'>(CH )NR2 [00327] In formula 4a, )& through Xe 2 , X 3 0 through X 9 , R', R", R", m, p and q are as described for formula (4), above. [00328] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (4) that are represented in formula (4b): 89 Formula (4b) XAI XAs XA2 HXA

XA

2 A N N XA7

XA

4 XAB [003291 In formula (4b), XA or XA2 are independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkoxy, alkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; XA and XA 4 are hydrogen; X" or XA 6 are independently hydrogen or lower alkyl, halogen, alkoxy, heterocycloalkyl (such as piperazinyl or morpholinyl), -(C=0)-NH2, -(C=O)-NH-(tower alkyl, or lower alkenyl, or lower alkynyl, or lower cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl,or heterocycloalkyl), or the groups: HN- R20 Rio [00330] In formula (4b), R 20 is selected from the following:

X

24 through X 27

X

36 through X" (CHO) j

(CH

2 )q [003311 In formula (4b), X 24 through X 21 , X 36 through X ', R' 2 , R 1 , m, p and q are as described for formula (4), above. 1003321 Exemplary compounds according to formula 4 include, but are not limited to, the following: 90 N N K) N N N N N:j NN N CI 0 NH N NF N N N H N HN N N N H N' N NO 0 H Iq I N N$ FCI OHI OH HA H H rN *, OH o N NO _, H NNAJ Nt N N)N A N rsN [003331 Further exemplary compounds according to formula (4) are described in the examples below. 5.2.4.1 Preparation of Compounds According to Formula (4) [00334] Compounds according to formula (4), (4a) and (4b) can be prepared according to any method apparent to those of skill in the art. The present invention provides the following exemplary methods for their preparation. [00335] Compounds of formula 4 can be prepared by several routes, such as those outlined in scheme 4-1.

91 Scheme 4-1 Method 1 H W H HHN H Ot- NH2O N N -J Method 2 NH H 2 N CCis 0 NH 4-HNHH CNH2 :N C " :NH2N H [003361 Method 1. [00337] Treatment of an aromatic, or heterocyclic o-diamine (such as an o phenylenediamine derivative or analog) with the corresponding 2 benzimidazolecarboxaldehyde affords the benzimidazolyl-benzimidazole. The reaction is generally performed in an organic solvent, such as acetonitrile, DMF, DMA, or methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol and the like at temperatures between 04C to 120 0 C, in certain embodiments at 20 to 80*C. The reaction is performed under aerobic conditions, or in the presence of sodium bisulfite or benzoquinone. The product is then isolated by concentration of the reaction mixture in vacuo. The product may be purified if desired by column chromatography or recrystallization. This is a general reaction and many modification of this procedure are known. The benzimidazole carboxaldehydes are either commercial products, or are prepared according to literature procedures, or other procedures commonly known in the art. [00338] Method 2. [00339] Treatment of an aromatic, or heterocyclic o-diamine (such as an o phenylenediamine derivative or analog) with methyl trichloroacetimidate in a suitable solvent, such as dichloromethane, 1,2-dichloroethane, glacial acetic acid, chloroform, or their mixture at minus 780C to 1 00*C, in certain embodiments minus 10 to 60*C produces the desired 2-trichloromethyl benzimidazole intermediate. When the reaction is complete, it is worked up by evaporation, or in the case of acetic acid solvent by precipitation of the product by pouring to water and filtration, or extraction of the product by an organic solvent, such as 92 chloroform. The desired 2-trichloromethyl benzimidazole product can optionally be purified by recrystallization or column chromatography. [00340] The 2-trichloromethylbenzimidazole intermediates (or their heterocyclic analogs) react with aromatic, or heterocyclic o-diamines, (such as o-phenylenediamine derivatives or analogs), providing the desired benzimidazolyl-benzimidazole derivatives or analogs. [00341] Exemplary compounds according to formula (4) and methods of their preparation are described in detail in the examples below. 5.2.5 Formula (5) 5.2.5.1 Compounds According to Formula 5 100342] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (5) that are represented in formula (5a): Formula (Sa) X( OH XB5 W- Nt XB6 /\ N vv*xB7 Xa3 X 2 4 H [00343] The compounds can also be depicted in their respective "keto" form, which under certain conditions may predominate over the corresponding "enol" form. However, all possible tautomers and stereoisomers (such as for example, but not limited to: E and Z, (trans and cis) are incorporated herein. [00344] In formula (5a), WE 1 , W 0 2 , XE 1 , X 22 , X" 3 , XE 4 , XES, X 96 , Xf7 and XE are as described for formula (5), above, with the following exceptions. [003451 In formula (5a), one of the substituents XES through XE3 can be the following group:

HNR

2 0 R1 [00346] In formula (Sa), each W', W 2 , W 3 , X" through X 3 , R", R! 9 , R, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, is as described for formula (5), above. 100347] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (5) that are represented in formula (5b): 93 Formula (5b)

X

8 1 OH XB5 N XE6 XB2 -N WB X"B 7 XES X 64 H X B8 [003481 In formula (5b), W8 2 is a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. If W 32 is a nitrogen atom, X" is absent. [003491 In formula (5b), each X 3 1 , XB2 and X84 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, cyano, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylanino (substituted by one or more groups selected from lower alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfmyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, heterocyclylamido, optionally substituted heterocyclyl or cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl, heteroalkyl). [003501 In formula (5b), XB 3 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, optionally substituted (aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, arylalkoxy, heteroaryalkoxy, arylthio, heteroarylthio, arylsulfoxy, heteroarylsulfoxy, arylsulfonyl, heteroarylsulfonyl, arylsulfonamido, heteroarylsulfonamido, arylaminosulfonyl, heteroarylaminosulfonyl), by substituents selected from halogen, hydroxy, amino, cyano, nitro, carboxamido, sulfonamido, alkoxy, lower-alkylamino, di-lower-alkylamino, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkoxy, cycloalkylalkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, methanesulfonyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, dialkylaminoalkyl, di-lower-alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaninoalkoxy, heterocyclyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclylalkyl. [003511 In formula (5b), each X 35 , XE? and XES is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, lower akyl, lower alkoxy, hydroxy, nitro, cyano, carboxamido, sulfonamido, azido, trifluoromethyl or trifluoromethoxy. [00352] In formula (5b), XE 6 is selected from nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom (such as piperazino, homopiperazino, morpholino, thiomorpholino, thiomorpholino-S-oxide, thiomorpholino-S,S-dioxide, pyrrolidino, piperidino, azetidino), nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a 94 carbon atom (such as piperazinomethyl, piperazinoethyl, homopiperazinomethyl, morpholinonethyl, thiomorpholinomethyl, thiomorpholino-S-oxide-methyl, thiomorpholino S,S-dioxide-methyl, pyrrolidinomethyl, piperidinoethyl, azetidinomethyl, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino or lower alkyl) and the following: 1 0 HN-R20 F R 1 [00353] In formula (5a), each W', W 2 , W 3 , X 4 through X", R, R, Re, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, is as described for formula (5), above. [003541 In particular embodiments according to formula (5), (5a) or (5b), X 6 is according to the following: H N-(CH 2 )q-R 24 wherein R 4 is selected from optionally substituted alkyl amino, optionally substituted dialkylamino, and optionally substituted heteroaryl, for example, optionally substituted triazole, optionally substituted imidazole, and optionally substituted pyrazole. In certain embodiments, R 24 is selected from dimethylamine, diethylamine, optionally substituted, triazole, imidazole and pyrazole. In certain embodiments, R2 4 is selected from diethylamine, 5-pyrid-3-yl-triazole, 4-imidazolc and 4-pyrazole. [00355] Specific embodiments of compounds of formulas (5), (5a) and (5b) include, but are not limited to the following compounds that were prepared according to the methods described herein: MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 361.4 457.5 95 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 562.6 458.5 521.4 478.6 318.4 381.4 541.9 569.9 * I418.4 418.4 501.6 561.7 96 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 575.7 486.6 443.5 388.4 428.6 331.4 344.4 519.6 533.7 444.5 401.4 346.4 97 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 386.5 289.3 302.4 553.1 567.1 478.0 434.9 379.8 419.9 322.8 335.8 549.7 98 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+i) 563.7 474.5 431.5 376.4 416.5 319.3 332.4 1.0 345.4 554.1 568.1 479.0 99 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 435.9 380.8 420.9 323.8 336.8 518.6 532.7 443.51 / 04400.51 4 ____________ 0'~385.5 :-L:88.3 100 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 301.4 519.6 533.7 444.5 401.4 346.4 386.5 289.3 302.4 560.7 574.7 485.6 101 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 442.5 387.5 427.6 330.4 343.4 554.8 568.8 479.6 436.6 381.5 421.6 324.4 102 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 337.5 537.7 551.7 462.6 4195 cF 364. 404.5 307.4 320.4 513.7 527.7 4 438.5 103 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 01 it395.5 4340.4 0H 380.5 OH 283.3 HH 296.4 N

K-H-

0 ,,498.6 512.7 423.5 380.5 325.4 365.5 268.3 104 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+i) __ PH281.4 512.7 423.5 380.5 325.4 365.5 FC C 268.3 yC, 281.4 548.7 562.7 473.5 105 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 430.5 375.4 415,5 CHl 318.4 PH 331.4 - - 474.5 488.6 399.4 356.4 301.3 4 C1 341.4 244.2 HOkiD 0- 106 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 257.3 HO 0H N) 593.8 607.8 518.7 475.6 420.5 460.6 363.5 376.5 492.6 506.6 417.5 107 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 374.4 319.3 359.4 -OH 262.3 275.3 535.6 549.7 460 417.4 362.4 402.5 305.3 108 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 318.4 593.7 565.5 617.8 603.7 631.8 617.8 450.8 579.7 563.7 592.7 ___________ ~550.7 109 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 589.7 534.6 533.7 534.6 562.7 588.7 818.2 495.5 362.4 524.6 538.6 566.6 110 MOLSTRLJCTURE MW (M+1) 566.6 580.7 552.7 577.7' 535.6 j 444.5 563.6 593.7 CHI 581.7 111 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 592.7 592.7 592.7 % Ix__ O562.7 580.7 567.1 634.8 376.4 362.4 563.7 565.6 626.7 112 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 550.6 620.8 606.7 593.7 563.7 576.7 610.1 541.7 6462 625.1 677.7 495.6 113 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 493.5 585.7 577.7 577.7 Cl-l . OLO612.7 612.7 627.7 [003561 Further specific embodiments of compounds of formulas (5), (5a) and 5b include, the following compounds that were prepared according to the methods described herein: MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 452.5 520.6 419.5 114 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 446.5 474.5 458.5 502.6 521.6 534.6 443.4 472.6 455.5 500.6 449.5 115 MQLSTRUCTURE MW (M+i) 472.0 474. 533.6 Ci 433.5 517.6 541.6 520.6 488.8 pA 452.5 ii. 472.6 511.6 535.6 116 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 486.6 469.5 535.6 548.7 517.6 541.6 481.5 458.5 485.5 499.6 505.6 0~ 495.6 117 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 481.5 520.5 469.5 486.6 51-.6 502.6 - :1 495.5 e:-Cl~l 502.6 533.6 481.5 118 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 534.6 466.5 468.5 435,5 447.5' 460.6 519.6 458.5 472.5 520.6 483.5 119 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+i) 480.5 520.5 496.8 443.4 458.5 428.4 496.5 480,5 500.8 466.5 472. _____________34_6 120 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 499.6 CHn 472.5 455.5 502.6 486.6 CII S'1 467.5 502.6 532.6 486.6 509.5 499,6 121 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+I) 419.5 447.5 459.5 441.5 433.6 tt% 431.5 p 473.6 - 445.5 500.6 472.6 484.6 500.6 122 MOLSTRIJCTUJRE MW (M+1) 447.5 544.6 474.6 486.6 473.8 418.4 cI~ ____45M 452.5 467.5 455.5 473.5 123 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+Id) ~ 454.5 458.5 ~4 458.5 501.6 ____________I c~ ~%477.5 469,5 435.5 466.5 447.5 44 5.5 7_______ 472.5 124 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) / 486.6 a 474.6 593.7 579.7 F 581.7 593.7 531.6 C4 496.5 612.7 616.7 125 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+I) 616.7 553.6 630.7 626.7 645.8 550.6 564.6 535.5 -jr577.7 636.6 375.4 389.4 126 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 458.5 416.5 563.7 5.2.5.2 Procedure for the Production of Amines in the Following Table 1003571 In this section, the term Int refers to acid and the term BB refers to amines. [00358] Procedure I (For Primaty And Secondary Amines) [003591 Each of a set of glass -tubes (6 mL) was charged with 100 pmol (500 pL) of Int, 110 pmol (500 I) of HBTU, 125 itmol (350 i) of amines (BB), and 75 sL of TEA. All the solutions were in DMF. The reaction mixtures were stirred on a Vortex shaker at 45 *C for 24 h. The reaction mixtures were purified by preparative LCMS. [00360} Procedure 2 (For Anilines And Low Basicity Amines) [003611 Each of a set of glass -tubes (6 mL) was charged with 100 pmol (500 pL) of Int, 110 pmol (500 p.L) of HATU, 125 pmol (350 pL) of amines (BB), and 100 pL of DIPEA. All the solutions were in DMF. The reaction mixtures were stirred on a Vortex shaker at 65 "C for 2 h. Then 50 pmol of HATU in DMF was added. The reaction mixtures were shaken again on a Vortex shaker at 65 "C for 24 h. The reaction mixtures were purified by preparative LCMS. [003621 In either procedure 1 or procedure 2, along with the target product, a by product of a reaction with the OH group formed (By). In order to hydrolyze the byproduct, a mixture of TFA (100 uL) and water (100 uL) was added to the reaction mixture 24 h before purification.

127 CR 1041 A\ / Int By [90363) By application of the above methodologies the compounds in the following table were prepared: 12R Structure M+t OH 0 CFa N C/ OCH, 433.48 NHC HN 0 N NI / /F N I C N-N H 00 ~N CH

OH

3 -- . .... 531 OH N / N N. t N CH, 5 3.5 3 H 0 OH H N N,' 'N H N-,NC:) 0 N

H

129

CH

3 OH N N~2 CH3 500.60_ \ I N CH,455.4 N-2 CM 3 455.46 OH 0 &N N CF, 466.52 OH 0 \ / N -N CH 474.54 OH 0 OH \ N/ N"CH N 'CH" 433.48 OH 0 CH4 C, N 'Cla48.5 130 N C NaH OH t I CH cHC NCH, 511.60 OH 0 ,%H N N 0 OHS N0 Nl CH HcH :9CHH \ 0 N CH 477.54 OH C~. H N) 526.66 OH 0 NN .455.49 OH 0 N " 131 OH 0 ~a526.61 N ON OH -N CHI/ N 15-7 - -C N CH 3 462.52 NOCH, 0 N CbR 419.46 OH 0 CH, N IN 0 -N " 'I'lH 3 537.601 OH 0 OH 3 M I H N N-N H -N9H 470.51 OH 0 00 OH 3 500.5 S/ N

H

132 OH 0 0 N CH, 451.50 OH H N N H N CH 523.57 N N CHCH H N CH3 O'595 0 -NN - N NH 0 HH '-N 520.52 133 H 0 OH N NN N N CH, OH 51.55 \ NH 3 516 OH 0 \ / N N CH, -N CH, CH, 3.1

..

3 536.61 0 H OH O N H N CH 3 516.57 OH 0 - NY

CH

134 CHH OH C N- NN NN HC 0 N CH 483.55 H H H OH 0 N N C OH 445,49ra / \ / N CH 1..1 1H - N C F64 5 9 .5 - 135 OH 0 H cH, r N C ON 0 431.511 N CH0 512,61 O..CH, OHOH NN Y1 ' -N CH6 c l - N C H .,5 0 0 .5 3 OH 0HOcara - N 'O.rN N CHN 433.48 HcH OH N 5C005 N/ H 0 N CH, 470.51 OHN C N H 466.52 136 N CN OH O N CH N O H 44 0 S452.49 -H N CH OH N- -1 CH, 8, 0 OH 0 F - N 0 - N E R 5 5 6 OH OH 2 NN 0 NOH H F N UF AU A 137 OH 0 NN N oN H CH 0 N CHa 534.64 OH 0 N N N N CF 481,53 OH O \ /C N CH 472.56 rO H 0 s 'I Ni N- N -N qcmi 514.56 OH 0 0 N C/- N N C H 00 - ' C 5 12 .6 7 138 OH 0 /CH3 OH I N H 0 N 'CH 469.52 OH O N N. .H3 NCC NC 0 N~N 0113469.52 OH 531.59C HH 0 -NN CHa N o 456.48 O N S N N09 N 'C H3 531.59 -- 48.5 OH N CHt 488.554 0- HHO Xrj~ HH 0 N 51.5 139 N T CHa

-

N N N '6 I~ I I N CH 480.54 CH OH 0 N CH N OH .. 530.67 OH H0 0 m N cH. 534.59 OH 0 N N U 470.55 OHO N CH, 25 . OH 0 NN 525.541 140 OH 0 1 0 0N N CHC 500.57 N ON N C H H N CH N N 'C 44.51 OH 0 47 1 -N C N 503.54 OH 0 N

-

e I-%Y N ~N OH, 454.50 OH 0 F- C , n- R 141 OH N N C N / 0i 465.53

H

3 C 01-1 N CH 455.4 - N N/ 442.45N N HH 0 N COH 3 455.49 OH 5 A N-0Q N C51 442.45 OH 0 N, NN H - N-" 0 NOH 516.65 142 OH \ / N C OH C 493.66 NNNN "11 H N H 470.51 OH 0 OH' O -N ' N N CH H 0 OH I .. 49 N HN

CH

3 547.56, NH N 469.52 I-I H CHO-f 143 OH 0 \ N N HH 0 ~N CH 483.55 OH 00 0

-

N CH, 0 N 509.54 OH 0 "" NN'C

NN

OH 0 N 522.58 OH 0 N-\ CH, / N N N CH, 456.48 OH 0 N - -N CH, //\ I C INN N CHC 481.48 N - N.1 -N 011c3 A rl 144 OR 0 N -N NC N NC IH

C

3 606.54 OH 'N 0 CH N CH 0 - N N. OH

%H

145 OH N CHa 447.53 OH0 H I N cH 481.53 OH 0 N c H N CH 3 517.56 OH 0. N C/ 533.5 H N CH 5133.56 CHI OH 4 0- CH 3 N 3H 501.95 OH 00R2 N N II OH N C345561 146 0H -\ NN1 / \ H 472.56 OH 0 N Nc OH 528.63p 'N CH 0 -NCa H C 514.60 OH 0 N CHH 517.56 OH 0 N -N C N N H N OHI N CHS 476.51 OH 0

OH

3 486.57 147 OH 0 \/ HN N HH 3 C 532.58 OH o OH N CH, 467.50 H C OH o N SCN, H 0N N CH 469.52 N NC / I\ NA0 N/N H N CH 4.59 OH 0 C. N NA HC q -N 'Cf- 3 148 0 H 0 -N CHN 401.44 OH OHH3 N% CHH 498.56 H N C 0 H 0 N 0823 507.57 OH 0 N N N<N " N .CH0 OH N52. 528,63 OH0 H 470,51 149 OH - N OH 01 NN N0 OH00 e - NI. -N OH ________________________________________535.60

H

3 C OH tO~ NN 483.55 N N -N Ai ~ OH 3 497.57 OH 09 N N-O 0 0H, 497.53 OH 0

-

N NI N cm, 474.491 150 OH O CN N) N CH469.52 OH -N CH, 520.59 o-CS OH 0 N N N O H 0 m NN CH OH H N C4N-. O AH 3 54.5 OH0 C// N C N 45553 151 OH NN CH HI OH -N CH 433.48 OH 0 CH 3 D(XI N N CH 3 466.52 OH N - N 48.5 N N HC1 . N CH, 523.59 OH 0 0 N 512.61 OHi 0 gH -~ N "iH N OH,487.53 OH0 NI~ -N OH 3 ,195 -OHN P' A C - N ' F 5 4 .58 OH 0 00 OHH OH - CH,502.551 0 N-0 0 OH 0 3 153 OH 0 / 1 \ N -zz N CH,551.62 OH 0CH, / NN \ 3 N 0 N 'CH. 483.55 \R / N OH CHN N NC 45.5 OH N 3H 493.50 OH \ / N CH -N 'di- 3 451.50 OH 0 - N 0- N Cc, 493.50 0H N CFt 415.471 154 OH 0 0 CH N OH HCH, \ oo N CH 517.56 \ / CH 3 N C 497.57 OH N ~CH, \o N CH, 511.60 OH NH \ N CH% 483.55 \ / OH 0 PH 0 o-N \/ / N N N 0 N CH, 534.55 OH - N, NI ~ t 00 C - OH 3 472.521 155 OH 0 CH, N C 500.62 OH C HN 0 503.54 OH N 4 .5 H 0 N CH, 460.54 OH C N CC 4 1 9 N CH,469.49 OH 0 - N 'C H 4 7O H5 0H OH 0 O H NeN N" N OH 3 48153) 156 OH 0 CH - N- N )- N H \N N CH 499.55 OH 0 O o CH, / \ q 0 -N CH 1 495.51 OH 0 N' H'N N N. IN 535.62 OH 0 N CH 461.49 OH 0 N -N C,509.58 OH \ / /CH, 0 N OH 3 417.481 157 OH 0 CH, N CH II 0 N CH 3 500.62 CH, OH 0 0 0 OHH, 0 N 'CH 475.52 \ OH N H CH, / \ 1 N 474 \ /0 / NCH H 0 N CH 417.48 /OH H -N~ C F 486.59 OH - N N5. N A 0 H 0 -N %C3535.62 OH < I H H y 0 OH -N 'CN I- 502.59 158 OH 0 - N N1 0 -N 'C11 469.52 - N N N N SH N N-/ 0 N 013 456.48 OH 0 'N 0 N ' 3 486.55 N N N HH 0 CN % 488.56 OH 0 0N1CH 477.54 159 OH 0 \ /I N CH, 533.56 OH0 M

-

N N /\ / N N CH 483.55 OHH \ / N N- C H /I \A XC H N CH, 485.52 OH S/ NN N \o N CH 3 467.50 OHOH0 NI' 10.

-,CH

3 \o N CH3 481.53 OH O ~ OH 537.59 016 - N N N OH 0 H 0 90 -11C 486.55 OH 0 H 0 N CH, 462.48 01 e - N' OH 0 HH OH N NH N44.5 N~N H 'N H N -N OCH3 531.59 161 OH0 N N llH N CH 471.49 OH N N SCHa / \ H IN N C 483.57 OOCH OH 0 N N jtOCH N -N CH, 497.53 HC H N C r a N O 4 9 .5 2 0 3 OH CAs H N N o 0 N~ CH 469.521 162 OH 0 \/ ~ ', ttNcNH, 0s 473.53 OH N CH 0 CHa 432.45 N CM 3 447.51 OHH CH13 486.55 OH 0 CH 3

-

N CH \ 01 /H1 0 N 'CH3 403.46 OH K)t -N& NJ N NN N C H3 3 . 9 163 OH 0 CH, / \N N HH -N

C

H3 455.49 \o N H CH 574 lHeN N oH N 'CH 3 457.47 OH N H N ' CH 461.54 O N HIN 495.5 0 N CH 497.51 OH 0 OH - NI O H 3 -N IH, 4615 N zo H IN 0 N 01%3 495.55 OH 0CH - N N H CN ~O~3495,56 164 OH J$E N N CH, 477.50 OH 0 K NyI{7 CH N C H 535. B CH, OH 0 N N HH 0 ~N CR346.5 OH0

-

N N P10 CR3 -N 'CR3 469.52 OH 0 r Ni N N H CH, -N 'Ci-j 469.52 OH 0 N - N N CH, 480.54, 165 OH 0 N|| N CH 472.54 OH 0 \/ NQHeht N N C 509.52 OH 0 N CH 3 459.52 OH OH C e N C N CH. 515.63 O H H cN a 490.54 OH4 -N CN 429.501 166 OH C e1 NN

H

3 N CH 3 484.53 OH 0 N 531.59 NNC H \o N CH 3 415.47 OH 0 -N 00CH, \ o " N C74 3 4 OH 0 OHN S H, 0 N 'OH 3 463.47, 167 N CH 3 530.56 OH OH j NN

SNH

2 0 -N CH 3 498.62 OH N O HC OK 0 - N N CHb 544.59 OHC N N' 4 N4 OH 3 528.83

H

3 0 OH 0OH 3 00 OH 0 -N N N OH -N OH 3 469.52 168 OH 0 CI- O N' 475.52 OH3 OHH - H N H N C113 46.64 OH 0s ~.. H N PI NI HH -N11 H e N

-

H 40346 169 OH CH, 0 N CH 3 447.51 CH, OH N \ CH, 0 N OH 3 483.55 OH C 'H 3 N N H 0 N CH, 541.65 OH H S CH, N CH, 511.58 OH 0 H OHH \ / N CH 447.51 H OH N H N CCH N CH3 494.53 170 OH 0 CH 3 CH. \ / / \ CH N CH, 483.55 OH NO N O 481.53 OH 0 - -N C / K \Fo-c N CH 3 459.52 0 OH S~ O-x - N N OH 3 ~ N\ H N H N C544.61 OH 0 CH3 / xrL NtY -- N C 48749 OH 0 CH N I HHH 502> N OCH 3 52 171 OH N N I / - \ N 0 OH 0 N qCH 53D.64 OH o0CCH, N \Io N CH, 481.53 OH N - N NJ N CHa 469.52 OH 0 NN N RCH, 531.59 OH 0 CH 3 ~' H N CN 481.54 N CH, 481.54 OH / \o0 H 0 N CH, 487.58 OH NO N / H\N W -N 'CH 503.54 172 OHO \/ N H N CH, 524.60 \ OH N N N NN H -N C&I 415.47 N OH 0 HN <N N N N N 3 53.57 OH 0 OCHt ICA1 0 \ H N CH3511.55 OH cre H NH 03 )F4J432.45 173 OH N H O H 0 N

OH

3 463.51 OH O H N CH 0 b N CH 521.50 OH CH - N \ o H NO -N OH, 534,59 OH~ K/I H 0 0 N 612.54: OH0 - N Nz c0 N 'CH 488.54 OH 0 H H N 'OH, 452.491 174 0..CH3 OH 0 OHa H N CHa 527,55 OH 0 -N / \ / -N 'C 454.50 OH O CH NN cN 0

OH

3 485.52 \ N/ N N N OHH N- N HH HH 0 N %CH 515.52 OH 0 NH OH 0 \ / N H 6H. -N OH 5 505.50 OH 0 NH H 0 N %C 506.541 175 OH 0 CH, \ /N / \I H \OH / \ H N C F 537.59 OH N N N03.5 / IH N CH 3 53.59 OH C \ / H 0 N CH 3 461.54 \O/OH \OH CH.

0 H q N CH, 4891.54 OH OH - N NS H 0 N 'c~444.54 OHoN - N. -%.% N N' WK3 OH 3 4N4A H 0 -N 01% 494.571 176 OH 0 HN-* N \N

NI

N COH 457.47 OH 0 S N CH, H H 0 N CH3 455.49 OH 0 OH \ I H N-CH 3 0H N 'C 469.52 SOH 0 N N 0 E N 'C4 519.54 OH OaC N-N N CHI \CH, 0 N CH3 483.55 OH 0 CF6 H - N! N N N ~ ~ -}i CHa H HC N C 511.60 OH -NN \ 1 N 'CH 195 177 OH OH 3\c HCCH, /\o N 'CM 502.59 OH 0 CM 3 - x t cHs H N CH 417.48 OH N CF 3 433.48 OHI 0 -N NI CHI \ /3 0 N CH 3 483.55 OH N- 488.56 OH -. N- NO CM N CH 486252 \o N 'CM 486.59 178 OH 0 N 8-N N A N Cw 3 534.61 OH~ O& OH N -~ N19.5 N A

HH

2 N 0 0 -N CCHl 480.50 OH I ez N 0 N CH 3 519.54 OH 0 N O N CA ) 507.57 ZJNnQOH3 41 HC0 0 -N OH 3 475.6' OH -N CH, N 5N-N C0H 3 -N OJ-I3 485.52 OH -N N H.. -N %C 505.55t 179 OH N N N 0 N CH, 521.60 OH CN 0 N 494.57 OH N8 0H N Cl- 500.62 '. OH 3 N-N 0 l N 'CH, 509.58 OH0 N e H 0 N CH, 498.56] 08 N ONCH N N '~~-j~497.53 , z0 N 'CH, 459.52 OH n 0 OH 0 N OH OH OHH -N N H, 181 OH s - N N N // \ H N 'CH 526.59 H3Oc OH 0 - N N N / \ K H IH N CRa 509.58 OH /NC N CH 5 N O 0 N H -N CH, 533.66 N N N 0C 505.55 OH 0 HH -N CH3 500.60 N OH - NN 0 -N 'OH3566 182 N N N 'CR N rH, 535.62 , OH 0 N HNm N '6H 3 536.61 OH 0

H

3 0 N 4 No 0 N O?-t~486-59 OH 0 CH, NH

CM

3 -N i 469.52 OH 0 N H 0NCM 3 635.62 OH - N ;'-. N- N CK (4 H OHH N H 3 565 183 OH N C 483.57 OH- 0 HN SN N N' CM N A:: H CH C- H CN 455.49 OH 'I H 0 I01 CH, 486.59 CH, OH 0 C N C~ 725 OH OH N N 473.55, 0 N 'C1 472.54 01K 0 0H - N 2.5 / I H CH 0 N 'C H3473.5 OHH N F 0 'N CH, -N L.N

-N

466.46 OH c rH -N - N It N-i N 5 0 1.S NN N HC C/N OH N ' C1-! 185 OHN CH N OH 3 499.55 H_ N CFa OH / N HN 472.54 OH o CH , 0 - N CH3 N CHa 431.51 OH 0 CH 1 H N N C1a 483.55 OH \ 0 N CH., 455.49 -N CH, 506.54 OH \ N N %Ca 480.54 186 NOH N N S N N CH, 336 H N OH 502.59 OH H OHH OH0 N 529.62 N41

I

- N HA q0 NH,52.6 OH0 N CH H 0 N00 N COH 495.51 o 4K n, o11e 187 OH 0 i N OHl 542.57 OH 0 NI / N Ho Ie N -N

'GH

3 462.4B S NN f-iN N CV6 502.57 OH0 NN 040 -N 'CH, 519.54' OH0 N/ 0 -N %H,-I 540.641 IS OH N OH 4 NN N N -CH OH H3 522,54 0N N Cl-i 43.59 - N N H WN N C H4 . 0 N OH O)H 0

-

N- N N

-

,- N c H N CH 48?7 .

189 OH cOH / NX 'N 0 N C, 469.52 OH 0 CHa NCa 483.55 N H~ 451.5 H N CH H5155 i-0 ~-N 9 0 515.56 OH N N/\ N CH 547.569 CH, OH 0 \/ NN N 4N-N NRo1w 484.531 190 OH F NO N C499.52 OH 9N N 4CH9 52 OH - N N 0 iC N N 480.54 N CF 535.62 Hc 0CH0 N 497.52 H

-

C4 N CH, 497.54 OH 0N N<) /, Q N 535.62-5 OH 0 tN N4 -N CH, 4475471 191 DH 0 0 N C 528.63 OH a F N N -' OH 0 CHa

-

N.N N'YjC SIOH N 'OH 539.56 OH /N N N 480,54 OH

-

N N /0 0 N 'C N 472.52 OH 0 NA ,N N NCH, 470.51 192 OH 0 N CH 455.49 OH 0 C \/ C, CH, ~N OH 3 497.57 N C 431.51 OH 0 N C 511.60 OH OH N I c 50& 5N H _I CH 0 CHS 486.57

SOH

3 N C N N 'OH 1 470.501 193 OHC OH NN N \ / H /\ oA N COH 3 4686.69 / 1\i N CH 3 488.49 OH O - N N NC / \/ H NA H N CH 479.51 OH 0 A; NN // \ o -~N CH 491.53 O H 519.54 O CHa OHOHO 080 - CH, N ~ 0 H N cH 3 519.53 194 Ni A H N ' s 483.55 OH 0 N CH H N OCH 458.51 OH \ CH, . . N C481.63 0 H CH

~OH

3 0583 N C 511.6 CHa 519.54 OH N NOw N A 0 - N H 3 41.53 OH 0 N OH 3 // I N - 024 0 N 0834511456 195 OH 0 N C N 5 56r OHH N 0C3 517.56 N N -H CH, \om N C H curI OH 0 N C N 419.4 N 0 467.50 oH 0 Nr 08 N 46746. 4 196 OH 0 NN H N R498.58 HC OH 0 - CH 3 NN N 506.54 -N N OH 0 N N CH, 513.59 N

-

5,H5 N OCH 3 537.84 OH 8 -N 513.5 OH N -N 'b%495.551 197 OH - N N H 491.53 OH 0 H OHH N 10 OH H 0 N COH 480.54 OHN - NN N N -~ OH OH OH - N OH OHH CH 417.48 198 0 H OH CH, OH 0 N 'H N N-y%-j H~ N 1 CH . . 498,51 N4 c 497.55 OH 0 N FF N C~H 535.60 N C H, 534.55 OH 0 0 \ N, N N CH, OH , 534.55 OH - 483.6 H ~ CH, OH <48_.55 199 OH N - N N / \D H N 0 N %C 522.58 OH 0 N' CH 3 H C NCH3 / N 01 -N %CH3 515.63 -T \ / 0 N C 458.49 N C 431.47 OH 0 O N N0 CH, / N H ' N 0 I H -N CM 3 471.49 OH N / I\ N N CH 3 477.51 200 ONH N 4 HN CH, 488. 52 OH 0 c N N 'CH3& CH N N -N N IH1 0 -N C 442.45 OH 0~ OHa N NCH, ' OH 3 531.59 OH 'I3C OHCh NN N CH,460.51 N 0 CH3N 0H N OH'705 201 OH N

-

N N COH 3 517.56 OH- 0 CH 3

-

N N zN OH O 0 CH N 500,0 / \ -N CHa 532,58 N C N 480.50H H N CH,4 500.60 OH 0 I WO N CH 532.53 H NI 'N IN >= H H N C011 507.53 OH 0 IN A N 0 0, H N Os 1I 595 202 N I H OH -N CH 3 494.55 OH 0 N NC H H H N CH 3 497.57 OH N NN N O N CH, H N R 01 N CH, 472.56 OH 0 C /\ / 0 N CH 3 472.56 O -N HH OH 0 \ N N N. // H -N Ca497.53 203 OH O CF6 N Cit N CH, 480.54 OH0 N CH, N 'C- 486.57 OH OHN Nk N CH 488.56 e NH2 00 OH 0 N N 0 N C CH3 515.59 OH O N

OH

3 CH 470.51 204 OH 0 N -- HC'N 0 N HC 524.60 OH (3-N N 0 N 'CH5 OH C -0 N CHa 520.61 N NN N H 00 .5 N

-

a -N C N CH, 504.52 OH 0 jryoNlrCHa N H OHO N 4 N9 03 CH, 1 549.611 205 OHN - 'N N OHS 456.48 OH 0 CHp 0 ' N NN Nl' 484.53 OH N 'OL-j 526.61 OHi 0 N N HH 0 cN OFi 472.48 OH0

-

Ne P N Q H N N OH OH 0 -N 'oH 3 472.541 206 F OH N OH NWCH NN N H 594 9 N OH 3 524.63 H C. OH 0 N-

N

N CH, 518.55 COH, OH 0 N N N H N OCH 3 535.62 - N- Nk N H14 470.51 O H 0 0 - N -N CH3 526.61 OH0 -N OH 3 519.54[ 207 OHOH N2 00 N CHa 536.61 OHH H N COH 3 484,53 OH CH N 4 H ~N 'o~j~525.54 0C5 9 N NI N3 .6 OH 0 H - 'O 255 OH N 0OH N 479.52 208 Nie N509.58 cN C 45,5 OH 0 N N N 0 -N CH_ 459.52 OH 0 N CH, 469.49 OH 0N - N 0 N C H 3 6 6 OH 0 0 N i OH 0 441.51 - N N-- 2 209 01 N 013 00.62 OH 0 HN-N Gil 3 - NN N HH 0 H N N/ OH 0 - N N.. N N AH 714 OH 0 N - 3 492.54 01 0 N 3 - N % tI-i51071 210 CH 517.56 N OC 522.58 OH OH N 502.59 OH0 - Ni N N N C 521.60 N CH 35Y.6 0 -N OH 3 50256 211 OH N N 0

N

N C: 525.596. 5 CN C N CH, 625.54 OH OH cial - N 43.CHS HO N A 5H5 N CH 3 481.54 OH / )N H 0 01% 472.52 /I H 0 N '01-3 447.47 OH O (H ClirM - N- Ne CH NA 0 N 'OFj 433.48 OH , N

-

O H N CHi 502.59 212 OH 0 OH 3 / I\ N OH 3 515,55 OH 0 cf-i Chri N ,CHa \ / H H H N C 433.48 OH 0 F N

C/

N 'CF-f N -N CH, N 546.58 OH C OH Cnr /\ / CH 'N CI 477.49 OH C0e1 / \ - N CR497.57

N

H 08 N 'CH 509.54 OH o - N / \/ N CH~I 520.56 213 N OH 'N / NN H 0 N %CH 3 531.59 OH OCHa O.H / \ H 0' 0

CH

3 C-N CH 3 511.55 OH 0 CH 3 cr N - , CH, / \ HI OH~ N-Cy H N C N 45 .5 CZ q 447.47 OH 0 N H 0 e c- OH11.~N 6 II N CH 3 483.50 OH 0 'H H~ / NIoY N H 4OH9 lN OCH 3 483.50 214 OHH I N CH33 94 N OH 3 OH - N N N ' HIHI N H,472.53 OH oo HH

OH

3 539.56 O H 0 ) N Iq /N s -N %G3485.58 OH 0 H N- 0 ____ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ___ ____ ___ ___ ___456.486 215 OHO S O -0 N \ / N N CH3 550.61 DH 06 CH3 N C 511, H N N /\o N COH 445.49 OH eN /\ o 14CH, N-N -N CM 3 533.56 00 \ /NN / 0 Ct -- N C 3 535.58 5.2.5.3 Preparation of Compounds According to Formula (5) [003641 Compounds according to formula (5), (Sa) and (5b) can be prepared according to any method apparent to those of skill in the art. The present invention provides the following exemplary methods for their preparation. [00365] Compounds of formula (5) can be prepared according to the general scheme 5

A:

216 Scheme 5-A RX RXI

H

2 N R2 -HN

RX

2 Rxx + , Rxx-/ I H H 2 N , RX3 [ N WX' RX3 RX4 H x 4 1003661 There are many references in the literature for this type of benzimidazole forming reaction, such as Abdelkrim Ben Alloum et at, 2003, Tetrahedron Letters 44:5935 5937, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. [003671 Further schemes for preparing compounds according to formula (5) include the following: General Scheme 5-B QN * .

NN N General Scheme 5-C RI~ I N +' + N ) - Q oo HP H2N / \ H OH 0 6N

OH

217 General Scheme 5-D HaN NN OH N ) NN ___________

H

2 N..X N -- ~N 00 \ / DNA, 10 C OH [003681 Detailed methods for preparation of compounds according to formula (5) are provided in the examples below. 5.2.6 Compounds According to Formula 6 [003691 In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (6) that are represented in formula (6a): Formula (6a) XCI OH X05 F F Rc /Ivc N Or Xc2

VJ

2 N ~XC6 [00370] In formula (6a), WI Wa, XCI through Xc7, QC and RC are as described for formula (6), above. [00371] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (6) that are represented in formula (6b); 218 Formula (6b) OH NF rQe R 0 - N X NH Xc 7 OH {00372] In formula (6b), Xc7 is hydrogen or methyl {00373] In formula (6b), Qc is a carbonyl group or a methylene group. 1003741 In formula (6b), Rc is as described for formula (6), above. [00375] In certain embodiments, the present invention provides compounds of formula (6) that are represented in formula (6c): Formula (6c) <771 OHQC F -- >RC2,RC3 NH H XC7 "OH C) [00376] In formula (6c), ZCI is 0, S S=0, S(=0) 2 or N-RC 1 [003771 In formula (6c), X7 is hydrogen or methyl. [00378] In formula (6c), Qc is a carbonyl group or a methylene group. [003791 In formula (6c), Rci is selected from lower alkyl, heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyL [00380] In formula (6c), Ra and Rc9 are selected from hydrogen or lower alkyl, and R2 with Rc 3 can form together a double bond to oxygen, thus forming an oxo-group (C=0). [00381] The following are further non-limiting examples of specific embodiments of formula (6e): 219 OH F N- OH F N \ N F NJ -N-\ NH- H -= -N NH- H "COH -iOH cl Cl OH F N OH F F - N 0~ N(CHN NH H)?N NH H '(OH 'POH cl Cl 220 OH N .F~ N)) HN / N N . (0HH5 ' NN N 0 /\CHO NH H - N -' NH H OH C OH F AN N N NJ OH FF N N N N N (C H NH HC -OH OH -- 'OH C OH FF C) N- N NJ OHF (0N o ar to onh - N NN H 'OH -"'O 5.2.6.1 Preparation of Compounds According to Formula (6) (003821 Compounds according to formula (6) can be prepared according to scheme 221 Scheme 6-1 1) MesU 2) l--

N

12 N OMe 3) n-BuU OU N OMe F F Br 0-, IC 0 0 2 N - NaOAc 0 2 N I Cu powder 2 N F HOAc UMSO KN 0,,,

H

2 N 80 C, 50 min H 2 N 60 C, 14h H.,N 98% 65% N F F BH 3 S(CHa) 2 F F O 0 2 N NJ THF OzN N 60 0,3 hi 0s. rt 19 h 96% H2N reflux,1.5h H 2 N 82% 1 0 0KO I H F~ FKr'1 2N N-N N . N\O

H

2 N\ NH N

H

2 0" H O OH Cl NN \ / 0F F$) C) NHN C1 OH N CC CI [003831 Exemplary compounds according to formula 6, and methods of their preparation, are described in d w.

222 5.3 Methods of Use 100384] In another aspect, this present invention provides methods for modulating the activity of a tyrosine kinase. In general, the methods comprise the step of contacting the tyrosine kinase with a compound of the invention. The contacting can be in any environ known to those of skill in the art, for instance, in vitro, in vivo, ex vivo or otherwise. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides methods of modulating the activity of a tyrosine kinase in a mammal in need thereof comprising contacting the tyrosine kinase with a compound of the invention.. [00385] As used herein, the term "modulation"' or "modulating" refers to the alteration of the catalytic activity of a tyrosine kinase. In particular, modulating can refer to the activation or to the inhibition of the tyrosine kinase. The tyrosine kinase can be any tyrosine kinase known to those of skill in the art. In certain embodiments, the tyrosine kinase is a receptor tyrosine kinase or an intracellular tyrosine kinase. [00386] In certain embodiments, the receptor tyrosine kinase is selected from the group consisting of EGFR, HBER2, HER3, HER4, IR, IGFlR, IRR, PDGFRa, PDGFR, TrkA, TrkB, TrkC, HGFR, CSFIR, C-Kit, C-fms, FIk4, KDR/Flk-1, Fit-1, FGFIR, FGF2R, FGF3R and FGF4R. [00387] In certain embodiments, the intracellular tyrosine kinase is selected from the group consisting of Alk, Src, Frk, Btk, Csk, Abl, ZAP70, Fes, Fps, Fak, Jaki, Jak2, Jak3, Jak4, Ack, Yes, Fyn, Lyn, Lek, Blk, Hck, Fgr and Yrk. [00388] In another aspect, the present invention provides methods for treating or preventing a tyrosine kinase related disorder in a subject in need thereof. In general, the methods comprise administering to the subject an amount of a compound of the invention effective to treate or prevent the disorder. The compound can be in the form of a pharmaceutical composition or a unit dose as described below. [00389] A tyrosine kinase realted disorder can be any disorder known to those of skill in the art to be related to tyrosine kinase activity. Such disorders include those related to excessive tyrosine kinase active, those related to reduced tyrosine kinase activity and to those that can be treated or prevented by modulation of tyrosine kinase activity. Excessive tyrosine kinase activity can arise as the result of, for example: (1) tyrosine kinase expression in cells which normally do not express tyrosine kinases; (2) increased tyrosine kinase expression leading to unwanted cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth; or, (3) decreased tyrosine kinase expression leading to unwanted reductions in cell proliferation, differentiation and/or growth.

223 [00390] The tyrosine kinase realted disorder can be a cancer selected from, but not limited to, astrocytoma, basal or squamous cell carcinoma, brain cancer, gliobastoma, bladder cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer, chrondrosarcoma, cervical cancer, adrenal cancer, choriocarcinoma, esophageal cancer, endometrial carcinoma, erythroleukemia, Ewing's sarcoma, gastrointestinal cancer, head and neck cancer, hepatoma, glioma, hepatocellular carcinoma, leukemia, leiomyoma, melanoma, non-small cell lung cancer, neural cancer, ovarian cancer, pancreatic cancer, prostate cancer, renal cell carcinoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, small cell lung cancer, thyoma, thyroid cancer, testicular cancer and osteosarcoma in a further aspect of this invention. [003911 The above-referenced tyrosine kinase realted disorder can be an IGFR-related disorder selected from diabetes, an autoinunune disorder, Alzheimer's and other cognitive disorders, a hyperproliferation disorder, aging, cancer, acromegaly, Crohn's disease, endometriosis, diabetic retinopathy, restenosis, fibrosis, psoriasis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, an inflammatory disorder and angiogenesis. [00392] Other disorders which might be treated with compounds of this invention include, without limitation, immunological and cardiovascular disorders such as atherosclerosis. 5.4 Compositions and Method of Administration [00393] In certain aspects, the present invention provides compostions comprising a compound of the present invention. The compositions can be used, for example, in the methods of use described above. [003941 In certain embodiments, a composition of the invention is a pharmaceutical composition or a single unit dosage form. Pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms of the invention comprise a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents (e.g., a compound of the invention, or other prophylactic or therapeutic agent), and a typically one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients or diluents. In a specific embodiment and in this context, the term pharmaceuticallyy acceptable" means approved by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or listed in the U.S. Pharmacopeia or other generally recognized pharmacopeia for use in animals, and more particularly in humans. The term "carrier" refers to a diluent, adjuvant (e.g., Freund's adjuvant (complete and incomplete)), excipient, or vehicle with which the therapeutic is administered. Such pharmaceutical carriers can be sterile liquids, such as water and oils, including those of petroleum, animal, vegetable or synthetic origin, such as peanut ( il, sesame oil and the like. Water is 224 a particular carrier when the pharmaceutical composition is administered intravenously. Saline solutions and aqueous dextrose and glycerol solutions can also be employed as liquid carriers, particularly for injectable solutions. Examples of suitable pharmaceutical carriers are described in "Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences" by E.W. Martin. [00395] Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more excipients. Suitable excipients are well-known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients include starch, glucose, lactose, sucrose, gelatin, malt, rice, flour, chalk, silica gel, sodium stearate, glycerol monostearate, talc, sodium chloride, dried skim milk, glycerol, propylene, glycol, water, ethanol and the like. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for incorporation into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a patient and the specific active ingredients in the dosage form. The composition or single unit dosage form, if desired, can also contain minor amounts of wetting or emulsifying agents, or pH buffering agents. [003961 Lactose-free compositions of the invention can comprise excipients that are well known in the art and are listed, for example, in the U.S. Pharmocopia (USP) SP (XXI)/NF (XVI). In general, lactose-free compositions comprise an active ingredient, a binder/filler, and a lubricant in pharmaceutically compatible and pharmaceutically acceptable amounts. Exemplary lactose-free dosage forms comprise an active ingredient, microcrystalline cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, and magnesium stearate. [00397] This invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, the addition of water (e.g., 5%) is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, NY, 1995, pp. 379-80. In effect, water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds. Thus, the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations. [00398] Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active in primary or secondary amine are in 225 certain embodiments anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected. {00399] An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions are in certain embodiments packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dosc containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs. [00400] The invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose. Such compounds, which are referred to herein as "stabilizers," include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers. [00401] The pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms can take the form of solutions, suspensions, emulsion, tablets, pills, capsules, powders, sustained-release formulations and the like. Oral formulation can include standard carriers such as pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, cellulose, magnesium carbonate, etc. Such compositions and dosage forms will contain a prophylactically or therapeutically effective amount of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent in certain embodiments in purified form, together with a suitable amount of carrier so as to provide the form for proper administration to the patient. The formulation should suit the mode of administration. In certain embodiments, the pharmaceutical compositions or single unit dosage forms are sterile and in suitable form for administration to a subject, in certain embodiments an animal subject, such as a mammalian subject, particularly a human subject. {004021 A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include, but are not limited to, parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, oral, buccal, sublingual, inhalation, intranasal, transdermal, topical, transmucosal, intra-tumoral, intra-synovial and rectal administration. In a specific embodiment, the composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures as a pharmaceutical composition adapted for intravenous, subcutaneous, intramuscular, oral, intranasal or topical administration to human beings. In an embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is formulated in accordance with routine procedures for subcutaneous administration to human beings. Typically, compositions for intravenous administration are solutions in sterile isotonic aquec try, the composition may also 226 include a solubilizing agent and a local anesthetic such as lignocamne to ease pain at the site of the injection. [004031 Examples of dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal administration to a patient, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspensions, oil-in-water emulsions, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amorphous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient. [00404] The composition, shape, and type of dosage forms of the invention will typically vary depending on their use. For example, a dosage form used in the acute treatment of inflammation or a related disorder may contain larger amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the chronic treatment of the same disease. Also, the therapeutically effective dosage form may vary among different types of cancer. Similarly, a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder. These and other ways in which specific dosage forms encompassed by this invention will vary from one another will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990). [00405] Generally, the ingredients of compositions of the invention are supplied either separately or mixed together in unit dosage form, for example, as a dry lyophilized powder or water free concentrate in a hermetically sealed container such as an ampoule or sachette indicating the quantity of active agent. Where the composition is to be administered by infusion, it can be dispensed with an infusion bottle containing sterile pharmaceutical grade water or saline. Where the composition is administered by injection, an ampoule of sterile water for injection or saline can be provided so that the ingredients may be mixed prior to administration. [00406] Typical dosage forms of the invention comprise a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate or hydrate thereof lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 1000 mg per day. Particular dosage forms of the invention have about 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 20.0, 25.0, 50.0, 100, 200, 250, 500 or 1000 meg of the compound.

227 5.4.1 Oral Dosage Forms [004071 Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention that are suitable for oral administration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups). Such dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990). [00408] In certain embodiments, the oral dosage forms are solid and prepared under anhydrous conditions with anhydrous ingredients, as described in detail in the sections above. However, the scope of the invention extends beyond anhydrous, solid oral dosage forms. As such, further forms are described herein. [00409] Typical oral dosage forms of the invention are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for administration. For example, excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents. Examples of excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms (e.g., powders, tablets, capsules, and caplets) include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents. [00410] Because of their case of administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage fonns are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary. [00411] For example, a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent. [00412] Examples of excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, bin and lubricants. Binders suitable 228 for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacauth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof. {004131 Examples of fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof. The binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form. [004141 Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101, AVICEL-PH-103 AVICEL RC-581, AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Corporation, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, PA), and mixtures thereof. An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581. Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL-PH- 103TM and Starch 1500 LM. 1004151 Disintegrants are used in the compositions of the invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms of the invention. The amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant. 1004161 Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, otl nixtures thereof.

[004171 Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, inannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, MD), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Plano, TX), CAB-O-SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incorporated. 5.4.2 Controlled Release Dosage Forms {00418] Active ingredients such as the compounds of the invention can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos.: 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, 5,354,556, and 5,733,566, each of which is incorporated herein by reference. Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions. Suitable controlled-release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients of the invention. The invention thus encompasses single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for controlled-release. 100419] All controlled-release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled counterparts. Ideally, the use of an optimally designed controlled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time. Advantages of controlled-release formulations include extended activity of the drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance. In addition, con- " ' ' ' ?- as can be used to affect the time of 230 onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels of the drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects. [004201 Most controlled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body. Controlled-release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds. 5.4.3 Parenteral Dosage Forms 1004211 Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to patients by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), intramuscular, and intraarterial. Because their administration typically bypasses patients' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are in certain embodiments sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a patient. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions. [004221 Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms of the invention are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water-miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non-aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate. [004231 Compounds that increase the solubility of one or more of the active ingredients disclosed herein can also be incorporated into the parenteral dosage forms of the invention. 5.4.4 Transdermal, Topical & Mucosal Dosage Forms [00424] Transdermal, topical, and nucosal dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic so. Teams, lotions, ointments, gels, 231 solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th and 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1980 & 1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels. Further, transdermal dosage forms include "reservoir type" or "matrix type" patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients. [004251 Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide transdermal, topical, and mucosal dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane-1,3-diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 16th and 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1980 & 1990). 1004261 Depending on the specific tissue to be treated, additional components may be used prior to, in conjunction with, or subsequent to treatment with active ingredients of the invention. For example, penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue. Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tetrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water-soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate). [00427] The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. In this rej s a lipid vehicle for the formulation, 232 as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition. 5.4.5 Dosage & Frequency of Administration [004281 The amount of the compound or composition of the invention which will be effective in the prevention, treatment, management, or amelioration of a disorder or one or more symptoms thereof will vary with the nature and severity of the disease or condition, and the route by which the active ingredient is administered.. The frequency and dosage will also vary according to factors specific for each patient depending on the specific therapy (e.g., therapeutic or prophylactic agents) administered, the severity of the disorder, disease, or condition, the route of administration, as well as age, body, weight, response, and the past medical history of the patient. Effective doses may be extrapolated from dose-response curves derived from in vitro or animal model test systems. [004291 Exemplary doses of a compound include milligram or microgram amounts of the active peptide per kilogram of subject or sample weight (e.g., about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 500 milligrams per kilogram, about 100 micrograms per kilogram to about 5 milligrams per kilogram, or about 1 microgram per kilogram to about 50 micrograms per kilogram). In general, the recommended daily dose range of a compound of the invention for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.01 mg to about 1000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in certain embodiments as divided doses throughout a day. It may be necessary to use dosages of the active ingredient outside the ranges disclosed herein in some cases, as will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. Furthermore, it is noted that the clinician or treating physician will know how and when to interrupt, adjust, or terminate therapy in conjunction with individual patient response. [00430] Different therapeutically effective amounts may be applicable for different diseases and conditions, as will be readily known by those of ordinary skill in the art. Similarly, amounts sufficient to prevent, manage, treat or ameliorate such disorders, but insufficient to cause, or sufficient to reduce, adverse effects associated with the compounds of the invention are also encompassed by the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. Further, when a patient is administered multiple dosages of a compound of the invention, not all of the dosages need be the same. For example, the dosage administered to the patient may be increased to improve the prophylactic or therapeutic effect of the compound or it may be decreased to reduce one or more side effects that a particular patient is experiencing.

233 [004311 In certain embodiments, administration of the same compound of the invention may be repeated and the administrations may be separated by at least I day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months. In other embodiments, administration of the same prophylactic or therapeutic agent may be repeated and the administration may be separated by at least at least 1 day, 2 days, 3 days, 5 days, 10 days, 15 days, 30 days, 45 days, 2 months, 75 days, 3 months, or 6 months. 6. EXAMPLES 6.1 Example 1: Compounds According to Formula (1) 0 - NHN S 11 N OH 0 N H N- \ NH N-j N OH N B [00432] 2-Ethyl-7-[2-(4-nitro-phenyl)-ethyl]-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane: A mixture of 2-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane (1.0g, 6.49 mM), Diisopropylethylamine (3 ml), 4-nitrophenethyl bromide (1.49g, 6.47 mM) in Dioxane was heated at 95 0 C for 16 h. The cooled reaction mixture was partitioned between ethyl acetate (2X 100 ml) and dilute 0.1 N KOH, the organic phase dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to afford crude2-Ethyl-7-[2-(4-nitro-phenyl)-ethyl]-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]nonane which was used as is in the next step. [00433] 4-[2-(7-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenylamine: 2-Ethyl-7 [2-(4-nitro-phenyl)-ethyl]-2,7-diaza-spiro{4.4]nonane from above was dissolved in ethanol (60 ml) and 20% Pd(OH)2 (30 mg) was added and the reaction was stirred 16 h under an atmosphere of hydrogen gas by means of a balloon reservoir. The reaction was filtered thru Celite and the filtrate evaporated to afford 4-[2-(7-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl] phenylamine and a crude oil (1.45g) which was used as is in the next step.

234 100434] N-{4-[2-(7-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-4-fluoro-3 nitro-benzamide: 4-{2-(7-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4}non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenylamine from above was dissolved in dichloromethane to which was added diisopropylamine (1 ml) and the reaction was cooled in an ice bath. A solution of 4-Fluoro-3-nitro-benzoyl chloride (0.5N, 8ml) was added and the reaction stirred for 1 h then evaporated under reduced pressure to a yellow foam which was used as is in the next step. [00435] 4-Amino-N-{4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-3 nitro-benzamide: N-{4-[2-(7-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyUl-phenyl}-4-fluoro 3-nitro-benzamide from above was dissolved in DMF (15 ml) and the solution was cooled in an ice bath and saturated with ammonia gas for 10 min. The flask was sealed and left at room temperature overnight. The DMF was then evaporated under reduced pressure and the residue partitioned between dichloromethane and 0.1 N KOH. The organic phase was dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified on silica gel using 10% MeOHICH 2 CI2 1% TEA to afford 4-Amino-N-{4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-3-nitro-benzamide (996 mg) as a yellow foam which was used as is in the next step. 'H NMR (300 MHz, d 6 -DMSO) 8 10.2 (s, 1H1), 8.70 (s, 1H), 7.96 (d, 1H), 7.82 (s,2H), 7.63 (dd, 2H), 7.24 (dd, 2H), 7.10 (d, 1 H), 2.65-2.35 (i, 14H), 1.96 (m, 411), 1.23 (t, 3 H). [004361 3,4-Diamine-N-{4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyll-phenyl} benzamiide: 4-Amino-N-{4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-3 nitro-benzaiide from above was dissolved in ethanol (25 ml) and IN HCI (6 ml) to which was added 20% Pd(OH)2 and the mixture hydrogenated overnight under an atmosphere of hydrogen gas. The reaction was then filtered thru Celite and the filtrate evaporated to afford crude 3,4-Diamino-N-{4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro(4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-benzamide (L18 g, 4XHC1 salt) as a tan foam which was used as is in the next step. [00437] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid {4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: A mixture of 2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde (20 mg ) and 3,4-Diamino N-{4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl}-phenyl)-benzamide HCI salt (60 mg) in dimethylacetamide (1.5 ml) was heated at 95 *C for 3 h then cooled and purified by RP HPLC (0.1 % TFA) to afford (A) 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl] phenyl}-amide (10 mg) LCMS MH+ 617.5 as well as (B) 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-hydroxy- 235 pyridin-3-y)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4-[2-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide (10 mg) LCMS M+ 603.7. [004381 Using procedures analogous to the above the following compounds were prepared. [004391 Starting from 2-Methyl-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undecane we obtained 2-[2 Hydroxy-5-(2-hydroxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4-[2-(8 methyl-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undec-2-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide. LCMS [ MH+] 631.5. [004401 Starting with 3-Methyl-1,3,8-triaza-spiro[4.5]decane-2,4-dione we obtained 2 [2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yi)-phenyl}-1H-benzoinidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4 12-(3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,3,8-triaza-spiro[4.5]dec-8-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide LCMS MH+ 646.5. 1004411 Starting with 1,3-Dimethyl-1,3,8-triaza-spiro[4.5]decane-2,4-dione we obtained 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4-[2-(1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,3,8-triaza-spiro(4.5]dec-8-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide LCMS MH+ 660.5. [004421 Further compounds prepared according to formula (1) include the following: MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 638.2 548.1 548.1 617 8 5~so~ftc~cn.603.7 631.8 236 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 617.8 6.2 Example 2: General Synthesis of Compounds of Formula (1) ,,R 101 Cul Hp R 0 2 N NAc O2N I HOCHCH 2 OH 2N (CHN Ij(CHy n HOAc K 3 P0 4 x Isopropanol

H

2 N 80 C. 50 m i HN s Crp8h H- 2 N 98% 55% Cn= 1 or 2 O c N I (CH Pd/C 0 OM(CN MeH4 H M N ~n rt3 h rt,l~ is N 86%f for 2 steps

NH

2

(CH

2 ) (CHn OH N Dq 4 ,R - N S(CH 2 N \(CH2)n \ / H dioxane \/ C OH N N CI 6.3 Example 3: Synthesis of Compounds of Formula (1): Spiro Compounds 0 2 N I H2N [004431 4-Iodo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline: To a mixture of 2-methyl-6-nitroaniline (106.5 g, 0.7 mol) and NaOAc (63.2 g, 0.77 mol) in acetic acid (525 mL) was added a solution of ICI (125 g, 0.77 m< .The mixture was heated at 80 "C for 237 50 min and poured into H20 (2100 mL). After stayed at the room temperature for 16 h, the mixture was filtered to furnish yellow solid that was washed with H2O (3 x 350 mL). Drying under reduced pressure at 40 *C for 48 h afforded the title compound (191 g, 98%). 1 H NMR (CDCl 3 ) 8 2.22 (s, 3H), 6.20 (br s, 2H NH), 7.53 (s, IH), 8.34 (s, 1H). ESI-MS n/z 279 02N H2N [00444] 4-(7-Ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-2-methyl-6-nitro-phenylamine: A suspension of 4-iodo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline (1.39 g, 5 mmol), 2-ethyl-2,7-diaza spiro[4.4]nonane (770 mg, 5 mmol), Cul (190.5 mg, 1.0 mmol), ethylene glycol (931 mg, 15 mmol) and K 3 P0 4 (3.2 g, 15 mmol) in isopropanol (40 mL) was sealed and heated at 90 *C for 19 h. After cooled down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (16:1 CH2C2/MeOH) to afford the title compound (910 mg, 60%). 'H NMR (CDC1 3 ) 8 1.29 (t, J=8 Hz, 3H), 1.96-2.19 (4H), 2.24 (s, 3H), 2.77 3.01(6H), 3.22-3.40 (4H), 5.78 (br s, 2H NH), 6.80 (s, 1H), 7.06 (s, 1H). ESI-MS miz 305 02N N N

H

2 N [00445) 4-(8-Benzyl-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undec-2-yl)-2-methyl-6-nitro phenylamine: A suspension of 4-iodo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline (1.39 g, 5 mmol), 2-benzyl 2,8-diazA-spiro[5.5]undecane (122 g, 5 mmol), Cul(190.5 mg, 1.0 mmol), ethylene glycol (931 mg, 15 mmol) and K 3 P0 4 (3.2 g, 15 mmol) in isopropanol (40 mL) was sealed and heated at 90 C for 19 h. After cooled down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (99:1 CH2CIl2/MeOH) to afford the title compound (593 mg, 30%). 'HNMR (CDCl 3 ) 8 1.24 (m, 2H), 1.48-1.68 (61H), 2.01 2.24 (m, 2H), 2.24 (s, 3H), 2.57 (rm 7M .73 (d. .= 12 Hz, 1H), 2.82 (n, 1H), 3.03 (m, 1H), 238 3.14 (d, J= 12 Hz, 11-), 3.47 (d, J= 9 Hz, 21), 5.30 (br s, 2H NH), 7.11 (s, 1H), 7.19-7.33 (5H), 7.44 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 395 (MHf. N N N - N [00446] 2-(2-Chloro-4-iodo-pyridin-3-yl)-6-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl) 4-methyl-IH-benzoimidazole: To a solution of 4-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-2 methyl-6-nitro-phenylamine (304 mg, 1.0 mmol) in MeOH (47.5 mL) were added Pd/C (10%, 40 mg) and acetic acid (2.5 mL). The mixture was stirred under atmospheric hydrogen (balloon) at the room temperature for 3 h and then filter over Celite. The filtrate was mixed with 2-chloro-3-formyl-4-iodopyridine (267.5 mg, 1.0 nunol), stirred at the room temperature for 18 h, and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) and 28% aqueous NH 4 0H solution (0.5 mL) was added. After it was stirred for 5 min, the mixture was concentrated and chromatographyed (5:1, CH 2 C1 2 /MeOH) to afford the title compound (450 mg, 86 %). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 5 1.38 (t, J= 8 Hz, 3), 2.10-2.21 (414), 2.56 (s, 3H), 3.28-3.57 (1014), 6.55 (s, IH), 6.57 (s, 1H), 8.03 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H). ESI-MS niz 522 (MH*). NN 1004471 2-Benzyl-8-[2-(2-chloro-4-iodo-pyridin-3-yl)-7-methyl-3H-benzoimidazol 5-yl]-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undecane: To a solution of 4-(8-benzyl-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undec 2-yl)-2-methyl-6-nitro-phenylamine (394 mg, 1.0 mmol) in MeOH (47.5 mL) were added Pd/C (10%, 40 mg) and acetic acid (2.5 mL). The mixture was stirred under atmospheric hydrogen (balloon) at the room temperature for 3 h and filter over Celite. The filtrate was mixed with 2-chloro-3-formyl-4-iodopyridine (267.5 mg, 1.0 mmol), stirred at the room temperature for 18 h, and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) and 28% aqueous NH 4 0H solution (0.5 mL) was added. After it was stirred for 5 min, the mixt chromatographyed (330:10:1 CH 2 C1 2 239 /MeOH/28% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (55 Mg, 9%). 'H NMR (CDC 3 ) 8 1.22-1.36 (2H), 1.49-1.84 (6H), 1.95-2.59 (611), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.94-3.45 (6H), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.87 (s, 1H), 7.16-7.33 (5H), 7.72 (d, J= 6 Hz, 11H), 7.99 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 612 (MH*. H H N N NH - N 100448] 2-[2-(2-Chloro-4-iodo-pyridin-3.-y)-7-methyl-3H-benzoimidazol-5-yl]-2,8 diaza-spiro[5.5]undecane: To a solution of 4-(8-benzyl-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undec- 2 -yl)-2 methyl-6-nitro-phenylamline (394 mg, 1.0 mmol) in McOH (47.5 mL) were added Pd/C (10%, 40 mg) and acetic acid (2.5 mL). The mixture was stirred under atmospheric hydrogen (balloon) at the room temperature for 3 h and filter over Celite. The filtrate was mixed with 2 chloro-3-formyl-4-iodopyridine (267.5 mg, 1.0 mmol), stirred at the room temperature for 18 h, and evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) and 28% aqueous NH4OH solution (0.5 mL) was added. After it was stirred for 5 imin, the mixture was concentrated and chromatographyed (100:9:1 CH 2 C1 2 /MeOH/28% aqueous

NH

4 0H) to afford the title compound (288 mag, 55%). 1H NMR (CDCl3) 6 1.28-1.72 (8), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.57-3.12 (8), 6.82 (s, 1H), 6.92 (s, 1$, 6.73 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J= 6 Hz, 11-1). ESI-MS m/z 522 (MH. N N N IN Cl [00449] 4-Chloro-3-[6-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-4-methyl-1H benzoimidazol- 2 -yl]-LH-pyridin-2-one: To a suspension of 2-(2-chloro-4-iodo-pyridin- 3 y1)-6-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4.4]non-2-yl)-4-methyl-1H-benzoimidazole (450 mg, 0.86 mmol) in 1-20 (1.5 nL) was added a solution of HCL in dioxane (4 M, 20 mL, 80 nmnol). After it was heated at 85 "C for 5 h, the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (100:10:1 CH2C12 /MeOH/28% aqueous NH 4 0H und (53 mg, 15 %). 1H NMR 240 (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 1.18 (t, J= 8 Hz, 31), 1.87-2.07 (4H), 2.54 (s, 311), 2.60-2.91 (6H), 3.19-3.39 (4H), 6.46 (s, 1H), 6.50 (s, 1H), 6.57 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (d, J=6 Hz, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 412 (MH*). H 0 H N N~ N% N N N A 01 [00450] 3-[6-(8-Benzyl-2,8-diaza-spiro(5.5]undee-2-yl)-4-methyl-1H benzoimidazol-2-yl]-4-chloro-1H-pyridin-2-one: To a suspension of 2-benzyl-8-[2-(2 chloro-4-iodo-pyridin-3-yl)-7-methyl-3H-benzoimidazol-5-yl]-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undecane (55 mg, 0.09 mmol) in H20 (0.75 mL) was added a solution of HCI in dioxane (4 M, 10 mL, 40 mmol). After it was heated at 85 *C for 18 h, the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (170:10:1

CH

2 C1 2 /MeOH/28% aqueous NH 4 0H) to afford the title compound (17 mg, 38 %). 1H NMR (MeOH-d) 8 1.23-1.35 (2H), 1.50-1.72 (6H), 2.09-2.31 (2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 2.58-2.65 (2H), 2.88-3.72 (6H), 6.60 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 6.83 (s, 1H), 7.19-7.32 (6H), 7.52 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 502 (MH). H 0 N H C1 [00451] 4-Chloro-3-[6-(2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undec-2-y)-4-methyl-1H benzoimidazol-2-yl]-1H-pyridin-2-one: To a suspension of 2-[2-(2-chloro-4-iodo-pyridin 3-yl)-7-methyl-3H-benzoinidazol-5-yl]-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undecane (144 mg, 0.28 mmol) in H20 (1.5 mL) was added a solution of HCI in dioxane (4 M, 20 mL, 80 inmol). After it was heated at 85 *C for 18 h, the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (50:10:1 CH 2

C

2 /MeOHI28% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (16 mg, 27 %). 1H NMR (MeOHl-d 4 ) 8 1.35-1.82 (8H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 2.90-3.19 (811), 6.60 (d, J=7 Hz, 1H), 6.89 (s, 1H), 6.96 (s, 1H), 7.58 (d, J= 7 Hz, 11-1). ESI-MS imz 412 (MH*).

241 NoN N NH OH CI t004521 4-{(S)-2-(3-Chloro-pheny1)-2-hydroxy-ethylamino]-3-[6-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza {00r4].4]non-2-yl)4-methyl-1H-henzoimidazol-2-yll-1H-pyridin-2-one: A solution of 4 chloro-3-(6-(7-ethyl-2,7-diaza-spiro[4 .4non-2-yl 0 156I-ewiiazl2yl-H pyrdin2-oe (3 ig,0.1 mml1 (S)-2-amino-1-(3-chlorophenyl)-ethauol(27 mg, 0.15 mmol) and Et 3 N (26 mg, 0.26 mmol) in EtOH (0.5 nL) was heated at 80 0 C for 18 h and then thereatio mitue ws eapoatd. The residue was purified by chromatography (150::

C

2 C1 2 /MeOH/2S% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (25 mg, 35%). 'H Nvf (MeOl{-d4) 8 1.16 (t, J=8 Hz, 3), 1.80-2.02 (411), 2.48-2.80 (411), 2.50 (s, 3H), 3.19-3.39 (4H, 3.63 (m, 2H), 4.81 (m, IH), 4.95 (m, 211), 6.18 (d, J- 6 Hz, 1H), 6.38 (s, 1H), 6.44 (s, 1H), 7.17-7.31 (311), 7.38 (d, J= 6 Hz, 111), 7.55 (s, 1H). ESI-MS mn/z 547 (MH). 0N N NININ NN NN NH OH Oci C1 [004531 3-[6-(8-Benzyl-2,8-diaza-spiro{5.5}undee-2-yl)-4-methyl-1H benzoimidazol-2-yl-4--[(S)-2-(3-chloro-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethylaminop1H-pyridin-2 one: A solution of 3-[6-(8-benzyl-2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5)undec-2-y1)-4-methyl-1H beuzoimidazol-2-yll-4-chloro-1H-pyridin-2-one (17 mg, 0.034 mmol), (S)-2-amnino-1-(3- 242 chlorophenyl)-ethanol (29 mg, 0.. 17 mmol) and Et 3 N (34 mg, 0.34 mmol) in EtOH (0.5 mL) was heated at 80 oC for 16 h and then the reaction mixture was evaporated. The residue was purified by chromatography (25:1 C1 2

C

2 /MeOH) to afford the title compound (8 mg, 64%). 'H NMR (McOH-d 4 ) 8 1.28 (in, 2H), 1.50-1.83 (4H), 2.07-2.27 (2H), 2.48-2.61 (2H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 2.82-2.94 (2H), 3.041-3.23 (2H), 3.40-3.55 (2H), 3.59-3.73 (21), 4.75 (m, 111), 4.98 (in, 1H), 6.20 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 6.75 (s, 1H), 6.84 (s, 1H), 7.19-7.32 (8H), 7.35-7.42 (2H), 7.54 (s, 111). ESI-MS n/z 637 (MH*). H H N N N NH \I N NH OH C1 [004541 4-[(S)-2-(3-Chloro-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethylaminol-3-[6-(2,8-diaza spiro[5.5]undec-2-yl)-4-methyl-1H-benzoimidazel-2-yl]-H-pyridin-2-one: A solution of 4-Chloro-3-[6-(2,8-diaza-spiro[5.5]undec-2-yl)-4-methyl-lH-benzoimidazol-2-yl]-1H pyridin-2-one (16 mg, 0.039 mmol), (S)-2-amino-1-(3-chlorophenyl)-ethanol (20 mg, 0. 117 mmol) and Et 3 N (16 mg, 0.156 mmnol) in EtOH (0.5 mL) was heated at 80 *C for 16 h. After it was cooled to room temperature, the reaction mixture was filtered to furnish yellow solid that was washed with MeOH (3 x 3 mL). The yellow solid then was mixed with 3 mL MeOH and the mixture was heated at 100 'C for I h. After it was cooled to room temperature, the mixture was filtered to furnish yellow solid that was washed with McOH (3 x 2 mL) to afford the title compound (10 mg, 47%). ESI-MS miz 547 (MI). 6.4 Example 4: Procedure for the synthesis of optically active aminoalcohol: (S)-2-(3-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethylamine 0 Cl0

OA

243 {00455] (S)-1-(3-Chlorophenyl)-ethane-1, 2 -diol: AD mix alpha (86.0 g) was added to a stirred mixture of tert-BuOH (300 ml) and H20 (300 ml), mixture was stirred for 15 min at RT, than cooled to 0*C. 3-Chlorostyrene (8.51 g, 0.061 mol) was added over IS min. The mixture was stirred at 0*C for 48h.The reaction was quenched by adding 10% aq. sodium sulfite (120 ml) followed by addition of EtOAc (200 ml). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (200 ml). The combined organic layers were washed with 0.4 M H 2

SO

4 in saturated Na 2 SO4 (100 ml), followed by drying over Na2SO4. The solvent was evaporated, the residue was separated on SiO 2 (70 g) (CI-C1 3 -MeOH 0 to 10%). Colorless oil, 9.83 g (0.057 mol, 93%). 'H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO) 6 7.20-7.40 (m, 4H), 5.39 (d, J=4.6 Hz, 1H), 4.76 (t, J=5.8 Hz, 1H), 4.54 (q, 4.9=Hz, 1H), 3.43 (m, 2H) 0 Ots CI N 0 1004561 Toluene-4-sulfonic acid (S)-2-(3-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxyethyl ester: To a mixture of (S)-1-(3-Chloro-phenyl)-ethane-1,2-diol (9.83 g, 0.057 mol) and triethylamine (11.8 ml, 0.086 mol) a solution of TsCI (10.87 g, 0.057 mol) in dichloromethane (50 ml) was added at oaC over 30 min. The mixture was stirred at 0*C for 4 h. Precipitate formed was removed by filtration, the filtrate was washed with water (50 ml), dried over Na 2 S04, evaporated. The residue vas dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (200 ml), filtered through a SiO 2 pad, evaporated. Colorless oil, 16.34 g (0.050 mol, 88%). 'H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO) 8 7.67 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 211), 7.42 (d, J=8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.20-7.35 (m, 4H), 5.90 (d, J=4.9 Hz, 1H-), 4.79 (q, J=5.1 Hz, 1H), 4.03 (m, 2H), 2.41 (s, 3H)

N

3 CI N 0 [004571 (S)-2-Azido-1-(3-chlorophenyl)-ethanol: A mixture of toluene-4-sulfonic acid (S)-2-(3-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxyethyl ester (16.34 g, 0.050 mol), sodium azide (6.50 g, 0.10 mol) and DMSO (50 ml) was stirred for 2 h at 80*C. Water (100 mi) was added, extracted with hexane-ether (1 ' " "ombined extract was dried over 24-f Na2SQ4, evaporated. The residue was separated on SiO2 (100g), hexane-EtOAc, 0 to 20%. Colorless oil, 7.0 g, (0.035 mol, 71%). 'HNMR (300 MHz, DMSO) 8 7.46 (s, 1H), 7.36 (m, 3H), 5.95 (d, J=4.5 Hz, 1H), 4.82 (q, J=5.3 Hz, 1H), 3.35 (m, 211). N CI- 0 [004581 (S)-2-Amino-1-(3-chloro-phenyl)-ethanol: A mixture of (S)-2-Azido-1 -(3 chlorophenyl)-ethanol (5.14 g, 0.026 mol), NaBH 4 (1.97 g, 0.052 mol) and isopropanol (100 ml) was stirred at 80 0 C for 24 h. The solvent was evaporated, the residue was separated on SiO 2 (15 g) CHC1s - MeOH (0 to 30%). Colorless oil, 3.70 g (0.021 mol, 83%). The material was reacted with Boc2O in dichloromethane and NEt 3 and analyzed by chiral SFC using a CIRRALPAK AD-H column, 30% MeOH and determined to be 91%ee. LCMS [Mi+H] 172.4. 'H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO) 8 7.24-7.39 (m, 4H), 4.46 (dd, J = 4.3, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 2.68 (dd, J = 4.3, 12.8 Hz, 1H), 2.57 (dd, J=7.5, 13.0 Hz, 1H). [004591 The above procedure can be used for the synthesis of additional chiral aromatic and heteroaromatic alkanolamines and also their partially or fully hydrogenated derivatives. 6.5 Example 5: Synthesis of Compounds of Formula (2) [00460] [4-(2-Chloro-pyrimidin-4-yl)-phenyl]-dimethyl-amine: A mixture of 4 dimethylaminophenyl boronic acid (10g, 60.6 mM), 2,4-dichloropyrimidine (9g, 60.4 mM), Na 2 C0 3 (12g, 114.2 mM), tetrakistriphenylphosphine palladium (2.5g , 2.1 iM), dimethoxyethane (120 ml) and water (35 ml) was heated at 80 0 under a nitrogen atmosphere for 16 hr. The reaction was cooled in an ice bath and the resulting yellow suspension was filtered and the solid washed with water (3X 50 ml) then ethyl acetate (2X 50 ml). The solid was dried in vaccuo to afford [4-(2-Chloro-pyrimidin-4-yl)-phenyl]-dimethyl amine (11.lg, 78% yield) as an orange solid. ES-MS MH+ 234,236, 'HNMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d6): 8.57 (d, 1H), 8.05 (d, 2H), 7.92 (d, 1H), 6.80 (d, 1H), 3.03 (s, 6H) [00461] 3-Amino-1-[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-yll-1H-pyrazole-4 carboxylic acid ethyl ester: A mixture of [4-(2-Chloro-pyrimidin-4-y1)-phenyl]-dimethyl amine (2.0g, 8.58 mM), 3-Amino-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.32g, 8.58 mM) , Cs2CO3 (4.4g , 13.58 mm in ThMF (15 ml) was heated 2 hr at 105 oC. The reaction 245 was then cooled to room temperature and diluted with water (100 mL) and the yellow precipitate collected via filtration and was washed with water (2X 30 ml) then ethyl ether (2X 30 ml). The solid was dried under vacuo and comprised a mixture of 3-Amino-1-[4-(4 dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrinidin- 2 -yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester and 5 Amino-1-[4-(4-dimethylamnino-pheny1)-pyrimidin-2-yl]-1H-pyrazoe-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester in a ratio of approximately 6:4. The solid is flushed thru a pad of silica eluting with 5% MeOH/dichloromethane/ 1% TEA and the material is pooled and evaporated to a solid. Crystallization from dichloromethane/MeOH afforded the slower of the two isomers 3 Amino- 1-[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-yl]-H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (1.1g, 36.4% yield) as a bright yellow solid. ES-MS MH+ 353, 'H NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d): 8.84 (s, 111), 8.63 (d, 1H), 8.15 (d, 2H), 7.77 (d, 1H), 6.93 (d, 2H), 5.85 (br s, 21)4.27 (q, 2H), 3.04 (s, 6H), 1.32 (t, 3H). Chromatography of the filtrate on silica eluting 1% TEA/ EtOAc can provide the other faster isomer 5-Amino-I -[4-(4-dimethylamino-phen l)-pyrimidin-2-y]-H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester as an off-white solid. ES-MS MH+ 353 , IH NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d 6 ): 8.7 (d, 1H), 8.12 (d, 2H), 7.83 (d, 1H), 7.79 (s, 1H1), 7.64 (br S, 2H), 6.84 (d, 2H), 4.28 (q, 2H), 3.04 (s, 6H), 1.28 (t, 3H). [004621 3-Amino-1-[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin.-2-y]-1H-pyrazole-4 carboxylic acid: A suspension of 3-Amino-1 -[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin- 2 y1]-H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (250 mg, 0.71 mM) in 1 N KOH (3 ml) and MeOH (4 ml) was heated at 95 'C for 1 hr allowing some methanol to distil off. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and neutralized with 1 N IICl. The resulting precipitate was collected via filtration, washed with water (IX 3 ml) and then dried in vacuo overnight to afford 3-Amino-1-[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2--yl]-1-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (170mg, 73% yield) as a yellow solid. ES-MS MH+ 325.4 'HNMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d 6 ): 8.72 (s, 1H), 8.60 (d, 1H), 8.15 (d, 2H), 7.70 (d, iH), 6.82 (d, 2H), 5.77 (br, 21), 3.03 (s, 6H) [00463] 3-Amino-1-[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-yl]-1H-pyrazole-4 carboxylic acid {4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-y)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: A mixture of 3 Amirno-1-[4-(4-dimethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimidin- 2 -yl}-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (35 mg, 0.108 mM) diisopropylethylamine (70 ul , 0.402 mM ), 4-[2-(4-Methyl-piperazin-1-yl) ethyl]-phenylamine (30mg, 0.1369 mM) in DMF (1 ml) to which was added HBTU (60mg, 0.1583 mM) and the stirred 16 hr at room temperature. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid washed with water (1X 1nil) and dried in vacuo to afford 3-Arnino-1-[ 4

-(

4 dinethylamino-phenyl)-pyrimi carboxylic acid (4-[2-(4-methyl- 246 piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl3-phenyl}-amide (13mg, 21 % yield). ES-MS MH+ 526.7. The filtrate may be purified via RP-HPLC 0.1% TFA to afford additional material. [00464] By application of the above procedure the following compounds were prepared: MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 525.7 543.6 557.6 518.6 543.6 513.6 526.7 485.6 498.6 512.6 512.6 241 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 525.7 395.5 414.5 404.4 526.7 526.7 494.6 508.6 526.7 443.5 498.6 488.5 248 MOLSTRUCTURE MW (M+1) 495.6 495.6 6.6 Example 6: Synthesis of Compounds of Formula (3) [004651 The compounds of formula 3 were prepared according to the following general scheme, Scheme 1. Scheme. OH 0 N N [004661 Preparation 1: 5,6-Dihydro-benzo[hjquinazoIin-2-ol (1): A mixture of alpha-tetralone (60 g, 0.41 M), urea (27 g, 0.45 M), triethylorthoformate (68 ml, 0.41 M), in methanol (80 ml) to which was then added methanesulfonic acid (100 drops) was heated at 100 *C for 30 min. then at 130 *C for 1 hr while allowing some solvent to distill off. The resulting thick suspension was cooled slurried with acetone (100 ml) and the solids isolated via filtration washing with acetone (2X 80 ml). The solid was dried under reduced pressure overnight to afford I as a yellow solid (42.lg as a 1:1 urea complex, 35.6 % yield). o OH O --- O* [00467 Preparation 2: 8-Methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[hlquinazolin-2-ol: A mixture of 6-Methoxy-3,4-dihydro-2H-naphthalen-1-one (90g, 0.511 M), urea (30.7g, 0.511 M), triethylorthoformnate (159g, 1.07 M), ethanol (300 ml) and methane sulfonic acid (300 249 drops) was heated in the microwave at 90 0C for I hr. then cooled to room temperature. The solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the residue dried under vaccuo. The solid residue was then suspended in ethanol (250 ml) cooled to 0 "C and the precipitate was isolated via filtration and washed with ethanol (2X 50 ml) and dried in vaccuo to give 8 Methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2-ol (43.95g, 38 % yield as a 1:1 urea complex) ES-MS MH+ 229.3 'H NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d) : 11.45 (br S, 1H), 8.08 (d, 1H), 7.76 (br S, 111), 6.95 (d, 1H), 6.91 (s, 1H), 5.4 (br S, 6H), 3.83 (s, 311), 2.85 (m, 2H), 2.66 (m, 21). OH N N C1 N 2 [004681 Preparation 3: 2-Chloro-8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benz o[hjquinazoline (2): A suspension of 8-Methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2-ol as a 1:1 urea complex from preparation I (20g, 69.0 MM) in POCl 3 (350 ml) was heated under nitrogen atmosphere at 100 "C for 20 hr. The POCl3 was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was suspended in dichloromethane (300 ml) and cooled in an ice bath and then concentrated sodium bicarbonate (500 ml) was carefully added followed by 1 N NaOH (200 ml) and the phases separated. The aqueous phase was extracted with dichloromethane (3X 500 ml) and the pooled organic phases were dried over Na2SO4 , filtered and the filtrate evaporated under reduced pressure to give 2-Chloro-8-methoxy-5,6-dibydro-benz o[h]quinazoline (2, 14.46g, 86% yield) as a yellow solid. ES-MS MH+ 247.1. H NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d 6 ): 8.54 (s, 1H), 8.09 (d, 1H), 6.99 (m, 3H)3.84 (s, 3H), 2.91 (m, 4H). O

H

2 N 0 CN N N N N N ON O 250 3 {004691 Preparation 4: 3-Amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[hjquinazolin-2 yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester(3): A mixture of 2-Chloro-8-methoxy-5,6 dihydro-benz o[h]quinazoline (2, 5.0g, 20.27 mM), 3-Amino-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester ( 3 .14g, 20.27 mM), CszCO3 (8.59g, 26.35 nM) in DMF (40 ml) was stirred at 100 *C for 2.5 hr then cooled to room temperature and diluted with water (400 ml). The resulting precipitate was isolated via filtration and the solid washed with water (3X 50 mL) then methanol (3X 30 ml). The solid was dried under reduced pressure which was comprised of a 7:3 mixture of 3-Amino-I-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[h)quinazolin-2-yl)-1lI-pyrazole-4 carboxylic acid ethyl ester(3) and it's isomer 5-Amino-1-(5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2 yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester identical to the material prepared in preparation 6 below.. The solid was then crystallized from dichloromethane (40 ml) to give the slower (TLC, EtOAc) of two isomers 3-Amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[hquinazolin-2-y) lH-pyrazole-4-carboxylie acid ethyl ester (3, 4.0g, 2 crops, 54% yield), ES-MS MH+ 366. The mother liquors may be purified via chromatography on silica eluting with ethyl acetate to provide the faster isomer 5-Amino-1-(5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4 carboxylic acid ethyl ester. HO HzN 0

H

2 N O N, N N N J, 0 4 {004701 Preparation 5: 3-Amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2 yl)-Hl-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (4): A mixture of 3-Amino-i -(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro benzolh]quinazolin-2-yl)-IH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester(3, 3.15g, 8.63 mM), 1 N NaOH (15 mL), and methanol (20 mL) was heated at 100 *C for 3 hr then cooled to room temperature and diluted with water (100 mL). the pH was adjusted with I N HCI to approximately 3-4 and the resulting precipitate was isolated via filtration, washed with water (2X 80 mL) and dried in vaccuc to give 3-Amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro benzo[hlquinazolin-2-yl)-IH-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (4, 3.02g, 100 % yield). ES-MS 251 MH+338.4 'H NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-do) : 8.81 (s, IH), 8.57 (s, 1F), 8.2 (d, 1H), 7.0 (dd, 1H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 2.93 (m, 4H). [00471] Preparation 6: 5-Amino-1-(5,6-dihydro-benzolh]quinazolin-2-yl)-1H pyrazole-4-carboxylie acid ethyl ester: A mixture of (8-Methoxy-5,6-dihydro benzo[h]quinazolin-2-yl)-hydrazine (100 mg, 0.41 mM), ethyl(ethoxymethylene)cyanoacetate (76 mg, 0.44 mM) in acetic acid (1 ml) was heated for 16 hr then evaporated. The residue was partitioned between dichloromethane and sodium bicarbonate (sat., 50 ml), the organic phase dried with sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to a solid. The solid was triturated with ethyl acetate and isolated via filtration and dried under reduced pressure to afford 5-Amino-l-(5,6-dihydro-benzo[hquinazolin-2-yl)-I1H pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester (63 mg, 42% yield) as a tan solid. ES-MS MH+ 366.3. 'H NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d 6 ): 8.65(s, 1$), 8.17(d, 1Hl), 7.78(s, IH), 7.55(br s, 2H), 7.02(d, 1H), 6.98(s, 1H), 4.25(q, 2H), 3.86(s, 3H), 2.95(m, 4H), 1.30(t, 311). 1004721 Preparation 7: 5-Amino-1-(7-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-be nzo[h]quinazolin 2 -yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid { 4 -1 2

-(

4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl) amide: A mixture of 3-Amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2-yl)-IH pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid (40mg, 0.118 mM ), diisopropylethylamine (70 ul , 0.402 mM ), 4

-[

2

-(

4 -Methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenylamine (30mg, 0.1369 mM) in DMF (1 ml) to which was added HBTU (60mg, 0.1583 mM) and the stirred 16 hr at room temperature. The resulting suspension was filtered and the solid washed with water (IX iml) and dried in vacuo to afford 5-Amino-1-(7-methoxy-5,6-dihydro-be nzo[hjquinazolin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole 4-carboxylic acid { 4

-[

2

-(

4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethylJ-phenyl}-amide (12mg, 19 % yield) as a white solid. ES-MS M-l+ 539. The filtrate may be purified via RP-HPLC 0.1% TFA to afford additional material. [00473] Using a procedure analogous to Preparation 5 the following was prepared: 5 Amino-1-(5,6-dihydro-benzo[hlquinazolin-2-y)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid. The title compound () was prepared from 5-Amino-1-(5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2-y)-1H pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid ethyl ester 'H NMR (300 MHz, ppm, DMSO-d 6 ): [00474] Using methods analogous to Preparation 1 the following compounds were prepared [00475] 10H- 9 -Oxa-2,4-diaza-phenanthren-3-ol: The title compound (7.65g) was prepared from chroman-4-one (20g) ES-MS MH+ 201 [00476] 1OH- 9 -Thia-2,4-diaza-phonanthrei-3-ol: The title compound (217 mg) was prepared from thiochroman-4-one (3.2g) ES-MS MH+ 217.4 252 [004771 6,7-Dihydro-5H-benzo[6,7]cyclohepta[1,2-dTpyrimidin-2-ol: The title compound (700 mg) was obtained starting with 6 ,7,8, 9 -Tetrahydro-benzocyclohepten-5-one (2g). [00478] 9-Methoxy-5,6-dihydro-benzo[h]quinazolin-2-ol: The title compound (420 mg)was prepared starting with 7 -Methoxy-3,4-dihydro-2H-naphthalen- I -one (8.14g). [004791 Synthesis of fial aide compounds [004801 General [00481] Solvents were evaporated on a Savant SpeedVac Plus SC25ODDA concentrator equipped with a Savant VLP80 pump and Refrigerated Vapor Trap RVT4104. Kieselgel 60 (0.04 x 0.063 mm) (Merck), silica gel 60 RP-1 8 (EM Science), and Celite 545 (Merck) were used. Dowex 5OW x 2H ion-exchange resin prior using was washed with methanol until pH 7. All final products were dried in vacuo at 40 0 C for 24 h. [004821 Preparation Of Amides [00483] lN,5-Disubstituted-4-Pyrazinecarboylic Acid + Amines [00484] Intermediate acid (200 umol) was dissolved in DMF (400 uL) and treated with a solution of BOP (200 umol) in DMFA (400 uL). Solutions of building block amines, (either commercial, or prepared by literature or other methods, as outlined below), (250 umol) in dichloromethane (500 uL) and diispropylethylanine (75 uL) were added, and the mixtures were left overnight at room temperature. [00485] Isolation and purification depended on the basidity of the final products. [00486] For basic aides the reaction mixtures were applied on a columns with Dowex 50W x 2H (4 mL of suspension prepared from Dowex-1 0% water in dioxane, 1 : 1), washed with 10% water in dioxane (3 x 4 mL), and eluted with 30% diethylamine in methanol (6 mL). Solvent was evaporated, and the residues were dissolved in dichloromethane and passed through silica (50 uL) to give after evaporating and drying desired aides. [00487] For neutral aides the reaction mixtures were quenched with water (100 uL) and evaporated to dryness on a Savant evaporator at 63"C for 6 h. Residues were dissolved in dichloromethane (200 uL), applied onto columns with dry silica gel RP-18 (40-63 urn, 0.8 g), and left overnight. Sorbent was consecutively washed with water (2 x 2 mL) and 10% acetonitrile in water (4 x 2 mL), and products were eluted with 70% acetonitrile in water (6 nL). Solvent was evaporated to dryness on a Savant evaporator at 63 0 C for 6 h, and residues were dissolved in dichloromethane (1 mL) and treated with aqueous 4% KOH (200 uL). Mixtures were stirred on a Vortex stirrer, and organic layer was passed through Celite 545 (4 253 uL of suspension prepared from Dowex-methanol, 1 : 1). Eluates were evaporated to final volume 500 uL and passed through silica (50 uL) to give after evaporating and drying desired amides. [00488] Average yield 42.69 umol. [00489] The following is a general outline of methodologies useful in the preparation of compounds of fonnula 3. Scheme 1 0 11 -S-OH 0 OH C R 0 urea, MeOH N N H OEt P A OEt B C POol 3 OH R O| OMe R oN N N OMe R /re aOt HC A D B thiourea s NaOEt EtOH N N N'J, N Mel DMCPBA E F [004901 Compounds of the present invention can be prepared by any of the above methods. As shown in SCHEME 1 the respective ketones A can be reacted with urea, trialkylorthoformate such as trimethyl or triethylorthoformate for example to afford respective compound B. Reaction of compound B with POC1 3 either neat or with a cosolvent, for example toluene or dichlorobenzene, with or without the addition of PC5 affords the respective compound C. Alternatively Compound A may be reacted with dimethylformanide dimethyl acetal for example to give intermediate D. Reaction of intermediate D with urea, sodium alkoxide for example NaOMe or NaOEt in a solvent such as ethanol affords respective compound B as the sodium salt which is neutralized with dilute acid to give B. Reaction of intermediate D with thiourea as above followed by reaction with methyl iodide 254 affords intermediate E which is oxidized using an oxidant for example metachloro perbenzoic acid in a solvent such as dichloromethane give compound F. SCHEME 2 CI NA N ~EtO t N N NH 2 H 2 NN E N C O N N Gi

H

2 N H EtOH_ NANC NHN 'N O::, DMF, CSC0 3 I~ A NA N G3 K N N 'NO

H

2

N-NH

2 N t EtCH HN-NH2 N' AN EtCH, HOAc [00491] Compound C or D from SCHEME 1 may be reacted with an aminopyrazole in a solvent such as DMF with a base like cesium carbonate to afford an approximate 7:3 mixture of compounds G and H. These may be separately isolated via crystallization or chromatograpy or trituration with solvents such as ethyl acetate or ethanol. Alternatively compound H may be prepared by reaction of compound C or D with hydrazine in an alcohol to afford intermediate I which can then be reacted with compound J, prepared from reaction of the cyano acetate and DMFDMA, in a solvent like ethanol and an acid like acetic acid to give compound H.

255 SCHEME 3 EtO HO

H

2 N 0 H 2 N o RHN NN NNHN N 1NKQI-1 N NI x NI NH 1 N KOH MeOH K HBTU a DMF M EtC HO 0 N RHN

H

2 HN N R N N N N N

H

2 N N H X L N [004921 Compounds G and H may separately be treated with a hydroxide source such as aqueous potassium hydroxide and methanol to yield the respective acids K and L. Acids K and L may separately be treated in a solvent such as DMF and an organic base such as DIPEA with a coupling agent such as HBTU or BOP for example to yield amides M and N. [004931 1. Typical procedure for the synthesis of 4-12-substituted aminoethyl] aniline compounds: R2 1, K 2 CO, CHCN B reflux RI + ,NR O2N IH Ri 2. 10% Pd/C, MeOH H2N 3 1 2 [00494] To a solution of 4-nitro phenethylbromide 1 (0.460g, 2 mmol) and disubstituted amine 2 (2 mmol) in acetonitrile (6mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.276g, 2 mmol) and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (10 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 nL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave 4-[2- 256 substituted aminoethyl] nitro benzene derivative. Then dissolved in methanol (10 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.050g) was added and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon). After completion of the reaction, palladium catalyst was filtered off and solvent was evaporated to give 4-[2-substituted aminoethyl] aniline 3 which was used as such in the next step. [00495] Reference: Cross, P.E.; Arrowsmith, J.E.; Thomas, G.N.; Gwilt, M.; Burges, R.A; Higgins, A.LL; J.Med.Chem. 1990, 33, 1151-1155. [00496] 2.Typical procedure for the synthesis of 4-[substituted aminomethyl] aniline compounds: R2 1. K 2 C0 3 , CH 3 CN Br H reflux

N.-R

2 .111+ H N, -1 RI

O

2 N R 2 10% Pd/C, H 2 N R 2 MeOH/EtOAc (1:3) 3 1004971 To a solution of 4-nitro benzylbromide derivative 1 (0.460g, 2 mmol) and disubstituted amine 2 (2 mmol) in acetonitrile (6mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.276g, 2 mmol) and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (10 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave 4-[substituted aminomethyl] nitro benzene derivative. Then dissolved in methanol/ethylacetate (1:3, 10 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.

0 50g) was added and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon). After completion of the reaction, palladium catalyst was filtered off and solvent was evaporated to give 4-[2-substituted aminoethyl] aniline 3 which was used as such in the next step. [00498] Reference: Cross, P.E.; Arrowsmith, J.E.; Thomas, G.N.; Gwilt, M.; Burges, R.A; Higgins, A.J.; J.Med.Chem. 1990, 33, 1151-1155. [00499] 3.Typical procedure for the synthesis of alkoxy substituted aniline compounds: 1. DEAD, Ph 3 P OH + HOR THF 0 2 N 2. 10% Pd/C, MeOH H 2 N R 1 2 3 257 [00500] To a stirred solution of nitro phenol 1 (0.765g, 5.5 mmol), alcohol 2 (5 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.442, 5.5 mmol) in THF (20mL) cooled to 0 (C was added diethylazodicarboxylate dropwise under N 2 atmosphere. Resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was treated with 4M HCI (3 mL, 12 mmol) and washed thoroughly with ethyl acetate (2x10 mL). Then aquoes layer was basified with 4M NaOH to P" -10, extracted with chloroform (2x 10 mL) and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave alkoxy nitro benzene derivative. Then dissolved in methanol (20 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.050g) was added and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon). After completion of the reaction, palladium catalyst was filtered off and solvent was evaporated to give 4-[2-substituted aminoethyl] aniline 3 which was used as such in the next step. [005011 Reference: Defacqz, N.; Tran-Trieu, V.; Cordi, A.; Marchand-Brynaert, J.;Tetrahedron Lett. 2003, 44, 9111-9114. [00502] 4.Typical procedure for the synthesis of 3-fluoro-4-(substituted amino) aniline compounds: R2 1. K 2

CO

3 , CH 3 CN NR FI reflux R1 0 2 N F +2. 10% Pd/C, MeOH H 2 N F 1 2 3 {00503] To a solution of 1,2-difluoro- 4-nitro benzene I (0.320g, 2 mmol) and disubstituted amine 2 (2 nimol) in acetonitrile (8mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.276g, 2 mmol) and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (10 inL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave 3-fluoro-4 (substituted amino) nitro benzene derivative. Then dissolved in methanol (10 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.050g) was added and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon). After completion of the reaction, palladium catalyst was filtered off and solvent was evaporated to give 3-fluoro-4-(substituted amino) aniline 3 which was used as such in the next step. [00504] Reference: Bevan, C.W.L ; Eur. J,Chem.Chem. 1968, 238-241.

258 [00505] 5-Typical procedure for the synthesis of pyridinyloxy alkylamine compounds: 0 N Br 1. K2CO, CH 3 CN N-(), N OH reflux A NH2 0 2. NH 2 N H 2 , MeOH N 1 2 reflux 3 [00506] To a solution of bromoalkyl phthalimide 1 (5 mmol) and pyridinol 2 (5 mmol) in acetonitrile (1OmL) was added potassium carbonate (0.690g, 5 mmol) and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (20 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave pyridinyloxy alkyl- I H-isoindole 1,3(211)-dione. Then dissolved in methanol (10 mL), hydrazine hydrate (0.48mL, 15 mmol) was added and stirred under reflux to give a precipitate. Filtered, washed with methanol (5mL) and evaporation of solvent gave pyridinyloxy alkylamine 3 which was used as such in the next step. [00507] References: Giardina, G.A.M.; Raveglia, L.F.; Grugni, M,; Sarau, H.M.; Farina, C.; J.Med.Chem. 1999, 42, 1053-1065. Effland, R.M.; Helsley, G.C.; Tegeler, J.J.; J.Hetcrocycl.Chem. 1982, 19, 537-539. [00508] 6.Typical procedure for the synthesis of 2

-(

4 -pyridin-2-ylpiperazin-1 yl)ethanamine compounds: 0 + 1. K 2 CO, CH 3 CN N NH 4 N B N N reflux N O Br N%> 2. NH 2

NH

2 , MeOH 0 2 reflux 3 [00509] To a solution of bromoethyl phthalimide 1 (5 mmol) and 2-pyridyl piperazine 2 (5 mmol) in acetonitrile (10mL) was added potassium carbonate (0.

6 90g, 5 mmol) and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (20 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave pyridinylpiperazine ethyl-1H- 259 isoindole-1,3(2H)-dione. Then dissolved in methanol (10 mL), hydrazine hydrate (0.48mL, 15 mmol) was added and stirred under reflux to give a precipitate. Filtered, washed with methanol (5mL) and evaporation of solvent gave 2-(4-pyridin-2-ylpiperazin-1-yl)ethanamine 3 which was used as such in the next step. [00510] References: Giardina, G.A.M.; Raveglia, L.F.; Grugni, M.; Sarau, H.M.; Farina, C.; J.Med.Chem. 1999,42, 1053-1065. Effland, R.M.; Helsley, G.C.; Tegeler, J.J.; J.Heterocycl.Chem. 1982, 19, 537-539. [00511] 7. Procedure for the synthesis of 1-(3-pyridin-4-ylpropyl)piperazine: 1. MsCI, TEA, DCM 2. K 2 CO, CH 3 CN N OH N Cbz reflux N N "), N+ 3. 10% Pd/C, MeOH 1 2 3 [00512] To a solution of 4-pyridyl propanol 1 (0.274g, 2 mmol) and triethylamine (0.3 3mL, 2.4mmol) in DCM (6mL) cooled to 0 0C was added methanesulfonyl chloride (0.1 5mL, 2mmol) dropwise. After completion of the reaction, diluted with DCM (lOmL), washed with saturated sodiumbicarbonate solution and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave mesylate derivative. Disolved in acetonitrile (6mL), amine 2 (2 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.276g, 2 mmol) were added , and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (10 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave a residue. Then dissolved in methanol (10 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.050g) was added and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon). After completion of the reaction, palladium catalyst was filtered off and solvent was evaporated to givel-(3-pyridin-4-ylpropyl)piperazine 3 which was used as such in the next step: [00513] 8. Procedure for the synthesis of 1-(3-pyridin-4-ylpropyl)piperidin-4 amine: 260 1. MsCI, TEA, DCM 2. K 2

CO

3 , CH 3 CN NON NHBOC reflux N 1 3. TFA, DCM NH 2 12 3 [00514] To a solution of 4-pyridyl propanol 1 (0.274g, 2 mmol) and triethylamine (0.33mL, 2.4mmol) in DCM (6mL) cooled to 0 0 C was added methanesulfonyl chloride (0.15mL, 2mmol) dropwise. After completion of the reaction, diluted with DCM (1OmL), washed with saturated sodiumbicarbonate solution and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave mesylate derivative. Disolved in acetonitrile (6mL), amine 2 (2 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.276g, 2 mmol) were added , and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (10 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave a residue. Then dissolved in DCM (4 mL), TFA (0.5mL) was added and stirred at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, solvent was evaporated to givel-( 3 -pyridin-4-ylpropyl)piperidin-4-amine3 which was used as such in the next step. [005151 9. Procedure for the synthesis of 4

-[

3 -(4-methylpiperazin-1 yl)propylaniline: 1. MsCI, TEA, DCM 2. K 2

CO

3 , CH 3 CN +N reflux N N02 3. 10% Pd/C, H2, H 2 N 0 2 N 2 MeOH 3 [005161 To a solution of 4-nitro cinnamyl alcohol 1 (0.274g, 5 mmol) and triethylamine (0.83mL, 6mmol) in DCM (2OmL) cooled to 0 0 C was added methanesulfonyl chloride (0.38mL, 5 mmol) dropwise. After completion of the reaction, diluted with DCM (20mL), washed with saturated sodiumbicarbonate solution and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave chloro derivative. Disolved in acetonitrile (20mL), amine 2 (5 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.690g, 5 mmol) were added , and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (20 mL). Then washed with water (10 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL), dried 261 over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave a residue. Then dissolved in methanol (20 mL), 10% Pd/C (0.050g) was added and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere (hydrogen balloon). After completion of the reaction, palladium catalyst was Filtered off and solvent was evaporated to 4

-[

3 -(4-methylpiperazin-l-yl)propyl]aniline 3 which was used as such in the next step. [005171 10. Procedure for the synthesis of 4 -[(1E)-3-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)prop 1-enyllaniline: 1. MsC, TEA, DCM +N 2. K 2 C0,

CH

3 CN HKNN 1 3. Zn, sat. aq NH 2 CI, H

O

2 N 2 MeOH [00518] To a solution of 4-nitro cinnamyl alcohol I (0.274g, 5 mmol) and triethylamine (0.83mL, 6mmol) in DCM (2OmL) cooled to 0 0 C was added methanesulfonyl chloride (0.3 8mL, 5 mmol) dropwise. After completion of the reaction, diluted with DCM (20mL), washed with saturated sodiumbicarbonate solution and dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave chloro derivative. Disolved in acetonitrile (20mL), amine 2 (5 mmol) and potassium carbonate (0.690g, 5 mmol) were added , and resulting reaction mixture was stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (20 mL). Then washed with water (10 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave 1-methyl-4-[(2E)-3 (4-nitrophenyl)prop-2-enyl]piperazine. Then 1-methyl-4-[(2E)-3-(4-nitrophenyl)prop-2 enyl]piperazine (0.100g) dissolved in methanol (4 mL), Zn powder (0.300g) and saturated aquoes ammonium chloride solution (1 mL) was added, and stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, diluted with methanol (4 mL), decanted and evaporated to give residue. Basified with saturated aquoes sodiumbicarbonate solution (2 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2x4 mL). Evoparation of solvent gave 4-[(IE)-3-(4-methylpiperazin-l yl)prop-1-cnyl]anilinc 3 which was used as such in the next step. [00519] 11. Procedure for the synthesis of 1-[4-(dimethylamino)benzyl]piperidin 4-amine: 262 O + N NHBOC 1. NaB(OAc)3H, AcOH, THF N 2. TFA, DCM

NH

2 2 3 [005201 To a solution of 4-dimethylamino benzaldehyde 1 (0.300g, 2 mmol) and amine 2 (2 mmol) in THF (6mL) was added acetic acid (0.23mL) followed by sodiumtriacetoxyborohydride. Resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18h. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was dissolved in chloroform (10 mL). Then washed with water (5 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (5 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave a residue. Then dissolved in DCM (4 mL), TFA (0.5mL) was added and stirred at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, solvent was evaporated to give 1-(4-(dimethylamino)benzyl]piperidin-4-amine 3 which was used as such in the next step. [005211 12. Procedure for the synthesis of 4-[4-(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)piperazin-1 yllaniline: N N N Sr/ N 1. TEA, CHCI N 2. Zn, sat. aq NH 4 CI, O2N N MeOH H2N 1 2 H [005221 To a solution of 4-nitro phenyl piperazine 1 (0.414g, 2 mmol) and 4 pyridylmethyl bromide hydrobromide 2 (0.506g, 2 mmol) in chloroform (10 mL) cooled to 0 OC was added triethylamine (0.83mL, 6mmol) dropwise. Resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature. After completion of the reaction, washed with water (10 mL) and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (10 mL), dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Filtered and evaporation of solvent gave 1-(4-nitrophenyl)-4-(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)piperazine. Then 1-(4-nitrophenyl)-4-(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)piperazine (0.560g) dissolved in methanol (20 mL), Zn powder (1.50 0 g) and saturated aquoes ammonium chloride solution (5 mL) was added, and stirred under reflux. After completion of the reaction, diluted with methanol (10 mL), decanted and evaporated to give residue. Basified with saturated aquoes sodiumbicatbonate solution (10 mL) and extracted with ethyl acetate (2x4 mL). Evoparation 263 of solvent gave 4-[ 4 -(pyridin-4-ylmethyl)piperazin-1-yl]aniline 3 which was used as such in the next step. [005231 12. Typical procedure for the synthesis of 3-amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6 dihydrobenzo[hlquinazolin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic amide: NH, OH t4 / ii \ + ,NHz HBTU, DIEA N 0 1 + R 2C DMF, RT 3 1005241 To a solution of 3-amino-1-(8-methoxy-5,6-dihydrobenzo[h]quinazolin-2-yl) 1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic acid 1 (0.084g, 0.25 mmol), HBTU (0.113g, 0.3mmol) and DIEA (0.18 mL, Immol) in DMF (ImL) was added amine 2 (0.3 mmol). Resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18h. After completion of the reaction, solvent was removed on rotavap and residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give 3-amino-1-(8 methoxy-5,6-dihydrobenzo[h]quinazolin-2-yl)-1H-pyrazole-4-carboxylic aide 3. [00525] Analytical data: NH, N N NH N N\ N [00526J 'H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) 81.40-1.62 (m, 2H), 1.70-2.14 (m, 4H), 2.20-2.40 (m, 2H), 2.50-2.60 (m, 4H overlapped with DMSO), 2.62 (t, J=6.0 Hz, 2H),2.93 (brs, 411), 3.65-3.85 (m, 1H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 5.89 (s, 2H), 7.05 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 111), 7.27 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, 2H), 8.09 (brs, 1H), 8.27 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.47 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, 2H), 8.56 (s, 1H), 9.21 (s, 1 H); LCMS n/z 539 (M + H*), ELSD 100%.

264

NH

2 N N / N <N [00527] 'H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) : 6 2.57 (brs, 411), 2.89 (brs, 411), 3.14 (brs, 4H), 3.61 (s, 2H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 5.97 (s, 2H), 6.92-7.05 (m, 311), 7.39 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.30 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (d, J= 12.0 Hz, 211), 9.41 (s, IH), 9.84 (s, 1 H); LCMS n/z 588 (M + H*), ELSD 97.6%. 6.7 Example 7: Synthesis of Compounds According to Formula (4) Br NH 2 Methyl trichloroacetimidate Br N

NH

2 AcOH, 3h 2 1 2 1005281 5-brono- 2 -(trichloromethyl)-1H-benzimidazole 2: To a solution of 4 bromo-o-phenylenediamine 1 (2.520g, 13.5 numol) in acetic acid (35mL) cooled to 0 0 C was added methyl trichloroacetimidate

(

2

.

64 0g, 15 mmnol) under N 2 atmosphere and resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3h. Diluted with water (200 mL) and resulting precipitate was filtered , washed with water (100 mL), dried in vacuum oven at 40 OC to give 5-bromo- 2 -(trchloromethyl)-1H-benzimidazole (4.lg, 97%). 'H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d 6 ) : 6 7.48 (d, J= 6.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (d, J = 6.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.88 (s, I H); LCMS n/z 315 (M + H), ELSD 100%. Reference: Louvet, P.; Lallement, G.; Pernot-Marino, I.; Luu Due, C.; Blanchet, G. Eur. J.Med.Chem. 1993, 28, 71-75.

265 N Br + C H2N N EtaN N Ci CI H 2 N MeOH, reflux, 12h 2 3 Br , N>N N::a BN N 4 [00529] 5-bromo-5'-(4-methyIpiperazin-1-yl)-1II,1'H-2,2'-bibenzimidazole 4: To a solution of 5-bromo-2-(trichloromethyl)-1H-benzimidazole 2 (4.020g, 12.84 mmol) and 2 anino-4-(4-methylpipcrazin-1-yl)phenylamine 3 ( 2 .645g, 12.84 mmol) in methanol (5mL) was added triethyl amine (7.70 mL, 51.36 mmol) under N 2 atmosphere and resulting reaction mixture was refluxed for 12h. Solvent was evaporated and saturated sodiumbicarbonate was added to the residue to give a precipitate. Filtered, washed with water (200 mL) and dried in vacuum oven at 40 "C to give 5-bromo-5'-(4-methylpiperazin-1 -yl) IH,1'H-2,2'-bibenzimidazole (5.12g, 97%). LCMS n/z 413 (M + H), ELSD 100%. rl N NII O>- H 2 N N Dimethyl acetamide 1 2 100 0C, 12h N :~ N N]f _N N N 3 [00530] Typical procedure for the preparation of Benzimidazolyl-benzimidazole: A solution of benzimidazole-2-aldehyde 1 (0.5 mmol) and diamine 2 (0.5 mmol) in dimethylacetamide (4mL) was stirred at 100 "C for 12h. Solvent was evaporated and residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give benzimidazole derivative 3. 'H NMR (300 266 MHz, MeOH-d4) : 6 2.52 (s, 3H), 2.85 (brs, 4H), 3.25 (brs, 4H), 7.05-7.15 (in, 2 1), 7.25-7.35 (s overlapped with m, 2 H), 7.60-7.75 (m, 411); LCMS mfz 333 (M + H), ELSD 99%. N O OHI I Pd(PPh) 4 , Na 2 CO N N NH 2 NH BsOHNH2 NH2 N O/ 1,4-dioxane/H 2 0 (3/1), 100 0 C, 12h N 3 1 2 [00531] 2 -amino- 4 -(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenylamine 3: To a solution of 4 bromo-o-phenylenediamine 1 (0.935g, 5 mmol), 2-methoxy-3-pyridyl boronic acid 2 and Na 2

CO

3 (1.060g, 1Ommols) in 1,4-dioxane/H20 (3:1, 20mL) flushed with N 2 was added Pd(PPh 3 )4 (0.575g, 0.5mmol) in one portion. Resulting reaction mixture was stirred under N12 atmosphere at 100 0 C for 12h. Solvent was evaporated and residue was extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL). Dried over anhydrous sodiumsulfate. Filtered, and evaporation of solvent gave a crude residue which was used as such in the following reaction. (0.850g). N O -N O

NNH

2 Methyl trichloroacetimidate N C NH2 AcOH, 3h N Cj CI 3 4 [005321 5-( 2 -methoxypyridin-3-yl)-2-(trichloromethyI)-1H-benzimidazole 4: To a solution of 2 -amino- 4 -(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenylamine 3 obtained from above reaction (0.215g, 1 mmol) in acetic acid (2mL) cooled to 0 0 C was added methyl trichloroacetimidate (0.193g, 1.1 mmol) under N2 atmosphere and resulting reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3h. Acetic acid was evaporated to give crude 5-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)-2 (trichloromethyl)-lH-benzimidazole which was used as such in the following step (0.3g). Reference: Louvet, P.; Lallement, G.; Pernot-Marino, I.; Luu-Duc, C.; Blanchet, G. Eur. J.Med.Chem. 1993, 28, 71-75.

267 N 0

H

2 N <N Et 3 N N C + MeOH, reflux, 12h H2N N C CI 8 4 N ON N N N N N 6 [005331 5-(2-methoxy-3-pyridyl) -5'-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)-1H,1'H-2,2' bibenzimidazole 6: To a solution of 5-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)-2-(trichloromethyl)-lH benzimidazole 4 obtained from above reaction (0.171g, 0.5 mmol) and 2-amino-4-( 4 methylpiperazin-1-yl)phenylamine 5 (0.103g, 0.5 mmol) in methanol (2mL) was added triethyl amine (0.6 mL, 4 mmol) under N 2 atmosphere and resulting reaction mixture was refluxed for 12h. Solvent was evaporated and residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give 5-(2-methoxy-3-pyridyl)-5-(4-methylpiperazin-1-yl)-1H,1'-l-2,2'-bibenzimidazole (10 mg). LCMS in/z 440 (M + H*), ELSD 100%. N N 0H2 Et 3 N NI NW ~ HN NN

NH

2 N V H MeOH, reflux, 12h N C1 CI 4 0 V 1 N.0 N NI N N N N N I H N N V [00534] 6'-(2-methoxy-3-pyridyl) -3H, 1'H-{2,2'}bibelzoimidazolyl-5-carboxylic acid-{4-(2-(4-methylpiperazin- 1-yl)-thyl)-phenyl} aide 8: To a solution of 5-(2 methoxypyridin-3-yl)-2-(trichloromethyl)-1H-benzimidazole 4 obtained from above reaction (0.171g, 0.5 mmol) and diamine derivative 7 (0.180g, 0.5 mmol) in methanol (2mL) was 268 added triethyl amine (0.6 mL, 4 mmol) under N 2 atmosphere and resulting reaction mixture was refluxed for 12h. Solvent was evaporated and residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give 6'-(2-methoxy-3-pyridyl) -3H, l'H-[2,2']bibenzoimidazolyl-5-carboxylic acid-{4-[2

(

4 -methylpiperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl} aide (21 mg). LCMS nlz 587 (M + H*), ELSD 100%. 6.8 Example 8: Synthesis of Compounds of Formula (5): Scheme 8-1 R R'CHO 1l 2 [00535] Method A: An array of 231 8-mL vials (3 diamines and 77 aldehydes) was prepared. Each vial was charged with the appropriate aldchyde (125 pmole each). To each of the 8-mL vials was added an aliquot of the appropriate stock solution of diamine 1 in 5% (v/v) AcOl-abs. EtOH (125 pole each). The vials were capped and heated to 80*C for 16 i in J-KEM block. The solvent was removed from each vial using the Genevac centrifical vacuum evaporator. The residue was dissolved in DMSO and filtered through a bed of celite (Thompson Instrument Company, California, 35 mg of celite per well). The filtered solutions of crude products were subjected to purification by reverse phase HPLC and analysized by HPLC-MS. [00536] The following compounds were prepared according to method A: MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 386.2 387.2 302.1 303.1 388.2 389.2 269 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 373.2 374.2 359.2 360.2 H 275.1 276.1 .N 41 350.1 C 334.2 335.2 2 5 0.1 251.1 0 407.1 408.1 NQ~ T 392.2 393.2 367.1 368.1 r ' 268.1 269.1 308.1 309.1 387.2 388.2 _ _ _ _ __ _ _ I _ 270 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 372.2 373.2 288.1 289.1 403.2 404.2 388.2 389.2 347.1 348.1 CH, 248.1 249.1 389.21 390.2 3 0 5

.

1 306.1 K 376.2J 377.2 292.1 293.1 403.2 404.2 271 MOLSTRUCTURE Called MS M+H found 388.2 389.2 390.1 391.1 375.2 376.2 291.1 292.1 373.2 374.2 c 274.1 275.1 376.2 377.2 361.2 362.2 CH, 277.2[ 278.2 397.2 398.2 382.2 383.2 298.1 299.1 272 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 380.2 381.2 296.1 297.1 K' ~ 394.2 395.2 §6 j 310.1 311.1 365.1 366.1 350.1 351.1 266.1 267.1 407.1 408.1 392.2 393.2 e -308.1 309.1 408.1 409.1 393.1 394.1 273 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 309.1 310.1 0 0O410.2 411.2 C~ 395.2 396.2 Q M' c4311.1 312.1

I

- "Io 452.2 453.2 e o 368.21 369.2 358.2 359.2 274.1 275.1 391.1 392.1 ct 376.2 377.2 292.1 293.1 389.2 390.2 274 MOLSTRUCTURE Calod MS M+H found 374.2 375.2 290.1 291.1 6c N 374.1 375.1 27 5

.

1 j 276.1 417.2 418.2 C)318.1 3191 -i288.1 289.1 390.1 391.1 - - -- 375.2 376.2 379.2 380.2 I { 295.2i 296.2 0422.21 423.2 275 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 0;407.3 408.3 394.2 395.2 427.2 428.2 343.2 344.2 301.1 302.1 433.1 434.1 415.2 416.2 443.2 444.2 428.2 429.2 344.2 345.2 I a 434.1 435.1 335.1 336.1 276 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 456.2 457.2 357.2 358.2 384.2 385.2 385.2 386.2 426.2 427.2 S298.2 299.2 214.1 215.1 435.3 436.3 420.3 421.3 346.1 347.1 4"' 331.2 332.2 247.1 248.1 277 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 418.2 419.2 319.2 320.2 436.1 437.1 421.2 422.2 374.2 375.2 290.1 291.1 378.1 379.1 294.1 295.1 368.1 369.1 C H0 353.2354.2 KcCH T 269.1 270.1 r 408.1 409.1 278 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 402.2 403.2 318.1 319.1 394.1 395.1 394.2 395.2 295.2 296.2 N 364.2 365.2 280.2 281.2 H3C 380. 379.2 38. 351.2 352.2 336.2 337.2 429.2 430.2 414.2 415.2 279 MOLSTRUCTURE Called MS M+H found 330.1 331.1 355.1 356.1 340.2 341.2 256.1 257.1 325.2 326.2 ca 310.2 311.2 all 393.2 394.2 378.2 379,2 399.2 400.2 385.2 386.2 375.2 376.2 360.2 361.2 280 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 374.1 375.1 275.1 276.1 CH 409.1 410.1 358.2 359.2 403.2 404.2 304.2 305.2 344.2 345.2 H3 260.1 261.1 "'401.21 402.2 [00537] Method B: An array of 231 8-mL vials (3 diamines and 77 aldehydes) was prepared. After diarnine 1 (3, 150 tmol each) in anhydrous DMF (1 mL each vial) was heated to 40 "C in J-KEM block, the appropriate aldehyde (125 pmol each) in absolute EtOH (5 mL each) was added in small portions to the diamine solution over a 1 h period. The reaction was stirred overnight at 78 "C in a sealed vial in J-KEM block. The temperature was reduced to 70 *C and the vessel uncapped to allow EtOH to evaporate. The residue was dissolved in DMSO and filtered through a bed of celite (Thompson Instrument Company, 281 California, 35 mng of celite per well). The sample was then concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the crude product which was then directly purified by reverse phase HPLC. [00538] The following compounds were prepared according to method B: MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 519.2 520.2 533.3 534.3 00 506.2 507.2 520.3 521.3 492.2 493.2 467.2 468.2 481.21 482.2 j c 0525.2 526.2 539.2 540.2 ' 499.2 500.2 282 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H ' 410.2 411.2 505.2 506.2 519.3 520.3 430.2 431.2 521.3 522.3 446.2 447.2 jc 479.2 480.2 522.2 523.2 536.3 537. 447.2 448.2 521.3 522.3 535.3 536.3 283 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 508.2 509.2 522.2 523.2 491.2 492.2 505.3 506.3 494.3 495.3 508.3 509.3 529.3 530.3 513.2 514.2 r 527.2 528.2 438.2 439.2 541.3 542.3 452.2 453.2 284 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 483.2 484.2 r 497.2 498.2 525.2 526.2 539.2 540.2 450.2 451.2 }526.2 527.2 540.2 541.2 451.1 452.1 S542.3 5431 5 599.3 600.3 510.2 511.2 505.3 506.3 285 MOLSTRUCTURE Calod MS M+H found 509.2 510.2 523.2 524.2 434.2 435.2 507.3 508.3 521.3 522.3 432.2 433.2 506.3 507.3 417.2 418.2 535.3 536.3 460.2 461.2 505.3 506.3 508.2 509.2 286 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 522.2 523.2 433.2 434.2 526.3 527.3 554.3 555.3 465.3 466.3 560.3 561.3 574.3 575.3 485.21 486.2 518.2 519.2 532.3 533.3 551.2 552.2 565.2 566.2, 287 MOLSTRUCTURE Calod MS M+H found 562.3 563.3 473.2 474.2 561.3 562.3 575.3 576.3 486.2 487.2 552.2 553.2 566.2 567.2 574.3 575.3 - 588.3 589.3 517.2 518.2 531.3 532.3 518,2 519.2 288 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 532.3 533.3 559.3 560.3 573.3 574.3 553.3 554.3 567.4 568.4 389.2 390.2 536.3 537.3 550.3 551.3 554.2 555.2 507.2 508.2 432.2 433.2 511.2 512.2 289 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found r 525.2 526.2 500.3 501.3 541.2 542.2 c 535.3 536.3 549.3 550.3 527.2 528.2 512.3 513.3 526.3 527.3 497.3 498.3 511.3 512.3 422.2 423.2 497.3 498.3 290 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 511.3 512.3 at 422.2 423.2 483.3 484.3 394.2 395.2 547.3 548.3 561.3 562.3 473.2 474.2 443.2 444.2 457.3 458.3 368.2 369.2 511.3 512.3 525.3 526.3 291 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 436.2 437.2 532.3 533.3 546.3 547.3 457.2 458.2 518.2 519.2 492.2 493.2 491.2 492.2 505.2 506.2 521.3 522.3 446.3 447.3 477.2 478.2 548.3 549.3 292 [00539] Method C: An array of 231 8-mL vials (3 diamines and 77 aldehydes) was prepared. To a solution of diamine 1 (125 pmole each) in absolute EtOH/HOAc (95/5, v/v, 1.25 mL) was added aldehyde (125 pmole each, 1.25 mL). The vial was capped and heated at 85 "C for 48 h on an orbital shaker. After the reaction cooled down to about 50 "C, the cap was removed and the vial was heated at 85 "C for I h to evaporate solvents. The residue was dissolved in DMSO and filtered through a bed of celite (Thompson Instrument Company, California, 35 mg of celite per well). The sample was then concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the crude product which was then directly purified by reverse phase HPLC. [00540] The following compounds were prepared according to method C: MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 346.1 347.1 328.1 329.1 315.1 316.1 0 319.1 320.1 262.1 263.1 301.1 302.1 N AN 237.1 238.1 293 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 276.1 277.1 \ / 352.1 353.1 295.1 296.1 334.1 335.1 J 312.1 313.1 294.1 295.1 295.1 296.1 334.1 335.1 332.1 333.1 275.1 276.1 314.1 315.1 348.1 349.1 294 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 291.1 292.1 r c 330.1 331.1 292.1 293.1 235.1 236.1 274.1 275.1 349.1 350.1 292.1 293.1 331.1 332.1 336.1 337.1 HC-O 0 N N 279.1 280.1 N:1 Hc-o 0 318.1 319,1 348.1 349.1 295 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found

-

291.1 292.1 330.1 331.1 335.1 336.1 278.1 279.1 317.1 318.1 N N 21 -331.1 19.1 261.1 262.1 30.1 30.1 264.1 -265.1 Ha N N 3. 4 Nzj 303.1 304.1 342.1 343.1 296 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found N 285.1 286.1 324.1 325.1 Cl% 363.1 364.1 306.1 307.1 -- 345.1 346.1 T 340.1 341.1 283.1 284.1 C 322.1 323.1 354.1 355.1 * (- - iX 2 97 .1j 298.1 N e ~ j 310.1 311.1 N 292.1 293.1 N' N 297 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found c0 352.1 353.1 295.1 296.1 N C 334.1 335.1 353.1 354.1 296.1 297.1 N tWNU, 335.1 336.1 355.1 356.1 O N o 1 298.1 299.1 337.1 338.1 412.1 413.1 -- 355.1 356.1 318.1 319.1 298 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 261.1 262.1 300.1 301.1 336.1 337.1 279.1 280.1 318.1 319.1 334.1 335.1 277.1 278.1 319.1 320.1 262.1 263.1 301.1 302.1 362.1 363.1 HG 305.1 306.1 299 MOLSTRUCTURE Called MS M+H found 344.1 345.1 332.1 333.1 275.1 276.1 314.1 315.1 335.1 336.1 278.1 279.1 317.1 318.1 -NW 282.1 283.1 321.2 322.2 367.2 368.2 c-\ 310.2 311.2 o--s 349.2 350.2 c, 300 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 282.1 283.1 387.2 388.2 360.1 361.1 318.1 319.1 357.1 358.1 388.2 389.2 331.1 332.1 379.1 380.1 322.1 323.1 361.1 362.1 401.2 402.2 344.2 345.2 301 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 287.1 288.1 326.1 327.1 345.1 346.1 327.1 328.1 386.2 387.2 329.2 330.2 368.2 369.2 380.2 381,2 323.2 324.2 362.2 363.2 'p 291.1 292.1 N 25 / \ 234.1 235.1 302 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 273.1 274.1 306.1 307.1 345.2 346.2 324.1 325.1 295.1 296.1 339.2 340.2 H3CH 282.1 283.1 321.2 322.2 _267.1 268.1 306.1 307.1 H C C 324.1 325.1 267.1 268.1 303 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found VCH ~b 306.1 307.1 H -C JH 296.1 297.1 278.1 279.1 374.1 375.1 317.1 318.1 356.1 357.1 300.1 301.1 243.1 244.1 HO NH HO \/4N 282.1 283.1 HO N N HD OH 270.1 271.1 N 213.1 214.1

-

338.1 339.1 304 MOLSTRUCTURE Calod MS M+H found 281.1 282.1 320.1 321.1 359.1 360.1 302.1 303.1 362.2 363 2 401.2 402.2 262.1 263.1 301.1 302.1 318.1 319.1 { 1 261.1 262.1 300.1 301.1 48N OH I _ 348.2 349.2 305 MOLSTRUCTURE Calcd MS M+H found 291.2 292.2 304.1 305.1 286.1 287.1 N N 361.1 362.1 304.1 305.1 6.9 Example 9: Preparation of 2-Hydroxyaryl Benzimidazoles N 0 ~NJ Ar 'N CHO H 2 NNN Dimethyl acetamide OH H 2 N A100 (C, 12h 1 2 N Ar N H OH3 100541] A solution of salicylaldehyde derivative 1 (0.5 mmol) and diamine 2 (0.176g, 0.5 mnol) in dimethylacetamide (4mL) was stirred at 100 0 C for 12h. Solvent was evaporated and the residue was purified by preparative HPLC to give benzimidazole derivative 3.

306 [00542] The aryl and heteroaryl salicylaldehyde derivatives (1) were prepared by reacting the appropriate arylboronic acid with 5-bromosalicylaldebyde, respectively its substituted derivative, or heteroanalog, either commercially available, or prepared according to general methodology. The reaction sequence is generally known as Suzuki reaction and is outlined in the following scheme: 0 0

AR-B(OH)

2 , (or pinacolyl ARN N H ester) H O H Pd[P(Ph)3]4 / Na2O03 W OH dimethoxyethane/

H

2 0 X= Br, I reflux, then extraction W=C or N and column chromatography [005431 AR=optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl [00544] The reaction was also performed using the boronic acid derived from the salicylaldehyde portion, according to the following scheme: 1. BuLi Br H MeOH, pTsOH (-H20) Br 2.(M O) (: H -- V-r- O H ----- OH or (EtO)3CH / pTsOH OH 0 0

(HO)

2 8 1 H AR-X AR O I X=Br, ,N H OH C 0 Pd[P(Ph)3]4 / Na2CO3 H dimethoxyethanel H20 reflux, then extraction and column chromatography [00545] Preparation of building blocks - substituted aldehydes: 6.10 Example 10: General procedure for Suzuki reaction [005461 A mixture of 5-bromosalicylaldehyde (2.01 g, 10.0 mmol), boronic acid (11.0 mmol), sodium carbonate (1.17 g, 11.0 mmol), Pd(PPh) 4 (0.58 g, 0.50 mmol), DME (18 ml) and water (6 ml) was degassed, stirred under N2 at 100"C for 5 h. After cooling to RT, water (10 ml) and DCM (20 ml) were added, mixture was shacked for 30 min, organic layer was separated, water layer was extracted with DCM (2*100 ml). Extracts were dried over 307 Na 2 S04, evaporated. The residue was dissolved in DCM (5 ml), purified ob SiO 2 (50g) hexane-EtOAc (0 to 20%). 0 N O. O [00547] 2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde: A mixture of 5 bromosalicylaldehyde (2.88 g, 14.3 mmol), 2-methoxypyridyl-3-boronic acid (2.20 g, 15.7 mmol), sodium carbonate (1.68 g, 15.7 mmol), Pd(PPh 3

)

4 (0.84 g, 0.73 mmol), DME (21 ml) and water (7 ml) was degassed, stirred under N 2 at 100*C for 5 h. After cooling to RT, water (10 ml) and DCM (20 ml) were added, mixture was shacked for 30 min, organic layer was separated, water layer was extracted with DCM (2*100 ml). Extracts were dried over Na 2

SO

4 , evaporated. The residue was dissolved in DCM (5 ml), purified ob SiO 2 (100g) hexane-EtOAc (0 to 20%). White solid 2.23 g (9.70 mmol, 68%). 'IH NMR (300 MIHz, DMSO) 3 10.88 (s, 1H), 10.31 (s, 1H), 8.16 (dd, 1=1.9, 5.1 I-Iz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J=2.5Hz, 1H), 7.74 (in, 2H), 7.08 (m, 2H), 3.88 (s, 31-). [005481 This method is applicable to the synthesis of substituted derivatives and the following compounds were prepared by application of the above methodology: 0 0 0

N

0 N0 N 0 N A N C1 0 0 NA0 0 A 0 N 0l N O 0ci 0 0 0Q N' AAO' 0 00

N

0 0 N N 0 1 0 N A cheN AN N N-a 0dPh,4 Na O OH H N A Nc'A mN

A

309 Hal R Pd(PPh 3

)

4 , Na 2

CO

3 + R'-B(OH)2 M DME - CHO CHO OH OH 100550] In a 250-mL three-necked flask, the halo-substituted compound R-Hal (18 mmol) was dissolved in redistilled dimethoxyethane (40 mL). The mixture was stirred for 5 min under argon atmosphere. Then tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (0.7 g, 0.6 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 45 min under argon atmosphere. Then a deaerated solution of boric acid R'-B(OH)2 (1.1 eq.) in a minimal amount of redistilled methanol (-5 mL per 2 g of boric acid) was added dropwise. After 10 min of stirring, deaerated 2 M Na 2 C0 3 (50 mL) was slowly added dropwise with vigorous stirring under argon atmosphere. The obtained suspension was refluxcd for approx. 20 h. Then the reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and evaporated to dryness in a rotary evaporator, not exceeding 40'C. The dry residue was dispersed in an ultrasonic bath and carefully acidified with 1 N HCI to pH -2 with stirring. Then solid NaHCO 3 was added with vigorous stirring, adjusting pH to ~5. After that, the mixture was extracted with CHC1 3 (6x30 mL). The combined extracts were evaporated in a rotary evaporator. The dry residue was dissolved in a minimal amount of CHC1 3 and passed through a silica gel column (chloroform-hexane, 4:1, as eluent). The compounds obtained, the scheme of synthesis, and yields are listed in the table below: 310 Compound Scheme of Synthesis Yield, % cCHO A 28 CI OH CHO A 26 O-c'o A 44 OH N7 CH0 A 44 OH ] CH0 B 54 CHO A 28 OH F CHO B 40 OH N CH B 14 OH 0 CHO B 33 1.1 OH - N CHO A 67 OH $ NCHO B 42 S-a OH _ _ _

_

311 CHO A 33 OH NA CHO A 24 OH N CHO A 70 OH N N CHO A 50 OH _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ [00551] Preparation of 3-formyl-hydroxyphenyl boronic acid [00552] 4-Bromo-2-dimethoxymethylphenol: A mixture of 5-bromosalicylaldehyde (41.0 g, 0.200 mol), trimethyl orthoformate (205 ml, 1.83 mol) and dry p-toluenesulfonic acid (1.77 g, 0.010 mol) was refluxed for 24 h. After the reaction mixture was cooled to the RT, sodium bicarbonate (50 g) was carefully added, and the mixture was ultrasonicated for 5 min. The liquid was separated; the solid was washed with dry benzene (25 ml) and removed by filtration. Combined solutions were evaporated. The residue was triturated with dry hexane (30 ml) if necessary cooled to -1 8"C. Precipitate formed was collected by filtration, washed with dry hexane (20 ml). Slightly yellow crystals, 44.2 g (0.179 mol, 89%). [00553] 3-Formyl-hydroxyphenyl boronic acid: To a solution of 4-bromo-2 dimethoxymethylphenol (10.0 g, 0.36 mol) in abs. ether (200 ml) n-BuLi (68 ml of 1.6 M hexane solution, 0.109 mol) was added dropwise under argon keeping the reaction mixture temperature below 25*C. Than the reaction mixture was refluxed for 3 h, then cooled to 954C, trimethyl borate (14.3 ml, 0.128 mol) was added dropwise keeping the temperature below -95 0 C. After the addition was completed the temperature was increased to the RT overnight. Aqueous 1 M HCl (200 ml) was added to the stirring reaction mixture to reach pH 1.0. Organic phase was separated; aqueous phase was extracted with ether (4x50 ml). Combined organic phases were evaporated; the residue was triturated with benzene (25 ml) 312 using an ultrasonic bath. Tan precipitate formed was collected by filtration, washed with hexane (2x10 ml) dried. Yield 2.63 g (15.8 mmol, 43%). 6.11 Example 11: Benzoimidazole Amide formed via Coupling with the Acid -N \ o H N OH N e OH 1005541 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid: To an ice-cold flask with a rubber stopper were added 2-hydroxy-5-(2 methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde (22.35 g, 0.0975 mol) and 3,4-diamino-benzoic acid (17.2 g, 0.113 mol) and the solid mixture was stirred at 0 *C for 15 min. Then DMA (120 mL) was added into the mixture via a syringe and the resulting solution was stirred at 0 *C for 2 h, and at the room temperature for 3 h. The rubber stopper was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred at 110 *C for 14 h open to the air. The DMA was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was mixed with 200 mL EtOAc, and sonicated for 15 min. The mixture was filtered to get the solid precipitate, which was mixture with 150 mL EtOAc, and sonicated for 5 rin. The resulting mixture was filtered to get the solid crude that was dried at 40 *C for 6 h under reduced pressure to afford a mixture of the title compound and DMA (ratio 1:1) (16.15 g, 38 %). 'H NMR (DMSO-d 4 ) 8 3.92 (s, 3H), 7.14 (in, 11), 7.15 (s, IH), 7.64 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (d, J= 6 Hz, 111), 8.19 (d, J= 6 Hz, IH), 8.21 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 8.29 (s, IH). DMA also shows as 81.96 (s, 3H), 2.79 (s, 3H) and 2.94 (s, 3H). ESI-MS n/z 362.5 (Mt. S-N N H N N 1\ H OH [00555] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid [ 2 -methoxy-4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amide: To a solution of 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (containing 1 equivalent of DMA, 44 mg, 0.1 mmol), 2 -methoxy-4-(4-methyl-piperazin- 1- 313 yl)-phenylamine di H-CI salt (29.4 mg, 0.1 mmol) and HATU (38 mg, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (1.2 nL) was added DIEA (45 mg, 0.35 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and heated at 60 *C for 3 h, and then evaporated to dry under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with DMSO (1.5 mL), filtered and then purified with using HPLC (TFA/H 2 0/CH 3 CN) to afford the title compound (26.4 mg, 39 %). ESI-MS m/z 565.5 (MH). .-- N N \0/\ NJ ~ N [005561 2 -1 2 -Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid {4-[2-(4-pyridin-2-yl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyI]-phenyl}-amide: To a solution of 2-[ 2 -hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (containing 1 equivalent of DMA, 44 mg, 0.1 mmol), 4-[2-(4-pyridin-2-yl-piperazin-1-yl) ethyl]-phenylamine (28.2 mg, 0.1 mmol) and HATU (38 mg, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (1.2 mL) was added DIEA (45 mg, 0.35 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and heated at 60 *C for 3 h, and then evaporated to dry under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with DMSO (1.5 mL), filtered and then purified with using HPLC

(TFA/H

2 0/CH 3 CN) to afford the title compound (26.6 mg, 39 %). '1H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) S 3.10-4.01 (12H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 6.87 (in, IH), 7.04-7.12 (21H), 7.21 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J = 6 Hz, 21H), 7.72-7.83 (51H), 7.89 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 8.09 (d, J= 6 Hz, IH), 8.17 (t, J= 3 Hz, 2H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 111). ESI-MS rn/z 626.5 (MiH). -N..N N N - N 0 [00557] 2

-[

2 -Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid [ 2

-(

4 -pyridin-2-yl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyll-amide: 1H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) S 3.49-4.01 (12H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 6.88 (in, 11), 6.90-7.11 (2H), 7.20 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.74-7.87 314 (4H), 8.03 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1f), 8.16 (m, 2H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 1H). ESI-MS nz 550.7 (MH*). N-- N N N 0 [00558] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid (4-2-4-(2-dimethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-ethyl}-phenyl)-amide: H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 5 2.56 (m, 2H), 2.83 (t, J= 6 Hz, 211), 2.96 (s, 611), 3.06-3.68 (1211), 3.99 (s, 3H), 7.09 (m, 1ff), 7.19 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.72-7.86 (SH), 8.03 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (m, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H). ESI-MS n/z 620.7 (MH*). \ N N -- N N [00559} 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid { 4

-[

4 -(2-dimethylamino-thyl)-piperazin-1-ylinethyl]-phenyl}-amide: 'I{ NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 5 2.52 (m, 21), 2.82 (t, J = 6 Hz, 211), 2.93 (s, 6H), 3.12-3.56 (10H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 7.09 (m, 1H), 7.20 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.74-7.92 (5H), 8.07 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (m, 111), 8.25 (s, IH), 8.33 (s, 1H). ESI-MS mIz 606.5 (MH). NN O NN --- N 0 [00560] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-metoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenylj-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid (4-{2-[4-(2-hydroxy-eth'yl)-piperazin-1-yll-ethyl-phenyl)-amide: 1H NMR(MeOH-d 4 )8 2.97-3.40 (14H), 3.85 (t, J= 5 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (s, 311), 7.10 (in, 1H), 7.22 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.69 (d, J=9 Hz, 211), 7.79-7.84 (2H), 7.89(d, J= 9 315 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (d, J 9 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (m, 1H, 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, 1). ESI-MS mn/z 593.5 (M*. NNN N [005611 2 -[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-S carboxylic acid [3-methyl-4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-ylmethyl)-phenyl]--amide: 'H NMR (MeOH-d4) 82.34 (s, 3H), 2.85-3.40 (8H), 2.87 (s, 3H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 7.10 (i, 1H), 7.21-7.39 (4H), 7.80-7.84 (2H), 7.90 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.15-8.18 (2H, 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 111). ESI-MS m/z 563.5 (MH*). 6.12 Example 12: Benzimidazole Amide Library via Coupling Reaction of the Acid with Annes General Scheme: .- N \ / \ ~ O O N ~ OH A N + R,RZNH - N OH FW = 361.36 + 78.12 = 439.48 -NO DIEA HPLC purification \ o HAT TFA/H 2 0/CH 3 CN H OH DMF N ' NR 1

R

2 F F -Ne OH n=0, 1 or 2 1005621 Library Protocol: [005631 Prepare 0.25 M solutions of the carboxylic acids in anhydrous DMF; 1005641 Prepare 0.25 M solutions of the anilines in anhydrous DMF; [005651 Prepare 0.5 M solutions of DIEA in anhydrous DMF; 316 [005661 Prepare 0.28 M solutions HATU in anhydrous DMF (freshly prepared); [00567] Arrange 12 x 75 nun culture tubes in an 8 x 11 array in a block; [005681 Place 500 uL (0.1 mmol, 1.0 eq) of the acid solution from Step A into the appropriate tubes; [005691 Add 500 uL (0.1 mmol, 1.0 eq) of the aniline solution from Step B into the appropriate tubes; [00570] Add 500 uL (0.2 mmol, 2.0 eq) of the DIEA solution from Step C into each tube; [00571] Add 500 uL (0.11 mmol, 1.1 eq) of the HATU solution from Step D into each tube; [00572] Seal each tube with a tube plug; [00573] Place the tubes on a orbital shaker at 150 rpm for 18 h; [00574] Uncap the tubes and remove the solvents in a GeneVac; [00575] Purify the residue by HPLC (TFA/H 2 0/CH3CN). [005761 By application of this methodology, certain amide compounds of the invention were prepared. [00577] Benzoimidazole amide formed from condensation of aryldiamine with aldehyde General Scheme 1 RI X N.) -0 H N& HNN

SOCI

2 OH 0V 8120 N RCM N

OH

317 General Scheme 3 H N H2N oH NH ,'-- N H2N DMA, 110 C OH -N N \ \ HN N N OH 100578) 2-[l 2 -Hydroxy-5-(2-mthoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid {4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyll-phenyl}-amide: To a suspension of silica gel (6.0 g) in dichloromethane (20 mL) was added SOC 2 (1.5 mL) and the mixture was stirred at the room temperature for 1 h (gas was released from the reaction mixture). 3,4 Diamino-N-{4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-benzamide (707.0 mg, 2.0 mmol) and 2 -hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde (458.5 mg, 2.0 mmol) were added, and the resulting mixture was stirred at the room temperature for 4 h. After methanol (10 mL) was added, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for another I h and was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue on silica gel was purified by chromatography (250:10:1 CH2Cl2/MeOH/28% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (528 mg, 47%).'H NMR (MeOH-d4) 8 2.25 (s, 3H), 2.35-2.71 (12H, 3.94 (s, 311), 6.96 (in, IH), 7.00 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.50-7.60 (4H), 7.66 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.79 (d, J 9 Hz, 1H), 8.06 (d, J= 7 Hz, 1H), 8.10 (s, 1H), 8.14 (s, 1H). ESI-MS mnz 563 (MH).

318 0 rN --o N ON N -- N X OH [005791 2-(4-Hydroxy-2',5'-dimethoxy-biphenyl-3-yl)-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid { 4 -[2-( 4 -methyl-piperazin-1-y)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: To a suspension of silica gel (0.8 g) in dichloromethane (3 mL) was added SOC1 2 (0.6 mL) and the mixture was stirred at the room temperature for 1 h (gas was released from the reaction mixture), 3,4 Diamino-N-{ 4

-[

2 -(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyll-phenyl}-benzamide (178.2 mg, 0.5 mmol), 4 -hydroxy-2',5'-dimethoxy-biphenyl-3-carbaldehyde (129.1 mg, 0.5 mmol) and 2 mL dichloromethane were added, and the resulting reaction mixture was stirred at the room temperature for 4 h. After methanol (5 mL) was added, the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for another 1 h and was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue on silica gel was purified by chromatography (250:10:1 CH 2 CI2/MeOI/28% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (217 mg, 84%).'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 2.26 (s, 3H), 2.37-2.72 (12H), 3.73 (s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 311), 6.80 (m, IlH), 6.94 (s, 1 H), 6.95 (m, 11H), 7.03 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1F), 7.13 (d, J=9 Hz, 2H), 7.49-7.64 (4H), 7.80 (d, J-= 9 Hz, 111), 8.10 (s, 1 H), 8.17 (s, 1H). ESI-MS inlz 592 (MHf). 0 N' N\N/N N N / I -- N X OH [005801 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(6-methoxy-pyridin-2-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid { 4

-[

2

-(

4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: To a suspension of silica gel (0.8 g) in dichloromethane (5 mL) was added SOC1 2 (0.6 mL) and the mixture was stirred at the room temperature for 1 h (gas was released from the reaction mixture). 3,4 Diamino-N-{4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-benzamide (178.2 mg, 0.5 mmol), 2 -hydroxy-5-(6-methoxy-pyridin-2-y)-benzaldehyde (114.6 mg, 0.5 rnmol) and 2 mL dichloromethane were added, and the resulting reaction mixture was stirred at the room temperature for 4 h. After methanol (5 mL) was added, the reaction mixture was stirred at 319 room temperature for another 1 h and was evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue on silica gel was purified by chromatography (250:10:1 CH 2 CI2/MeOHI28% aqueous NH 4 0H) to afford the title compound (190 mg, 68%).'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 2.26 (s, 3H), 2.37-2.72 (12H), 4.01 (s, 3H), 6.62 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.04 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.12 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.37 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.54-7.63 (2H), 7.76 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 8.04 (d, J= 6 Hz, IH), 8.13 (s, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H). ESI-MS n/z 563 (MH+ F N N O N / \ - N OH H [00581] 2-(4'-Fluoro-4-hydroxy-biphenyl-3-yI)-1H-henzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl)-amide: 'H1 NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 6 2.25 (s, 3H), 2.35-2.71 (12H), 7.00 (d, J= 9 lHz, 1H), 7.04-7.12 (511), 7.48-7.60 (6H), 7.73 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (d, J 7 Iz, 1H). ESI-MS n/z 550 (MH+. N S N H IN OH [00582] 2-(5-Benzothiazol-2-yl-2-hydroxy-phenyl)-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid {4-12-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH d 4 ) 8 2.31 (s, 3H), 2.48-2.79 (12H), 7.04 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.16 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.33 (m, 111), 7.42 (m, 1H), 7.56 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.57 (m, 1H), 7.77 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.82-7.96 (3H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 8.52 (s, 111). ESI-MS mlz 589 (MH*). N 00 -'NJ. N N N /\ N N - N 0 320 [005831 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-hydroxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyll-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid { 4 -[2-( 4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH d 4 ) 32.32 (s, 3H), 2.45-2.85 (12H), 6.51 (m, IH), 7.06 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.22 (d, J= 9Hz, 2H), 7.41 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.61-7.71 (3H), 7.77 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H-), 7.86 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.22 (s, 1IH), 8.30 (s, 1H). ESI-MS n/z 549.5 (MH). General Scheme 2 N N H of H2N tJ CHa 0,N 0 H N -- o \ 0 DMA1iofC OH N O0N N ONN

H

2 N [00584] 3

-(

4 -Methyl-piperazin-1..yl)-2..nitro-phenylamine: A mixture of 3-chloro-2 nitro-phenylamine (172.6 mg, 1 mmol) and I-methyl-piperazine (1.5 mL) was heated at 200 'C in a Biotage Initiator Sixty microwave reactor for 15 min, cooled to the room temperature, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (500:10:1 CH 2

CI

2 /IMeOH/28% aqueous NH401H) to afford the title compound (139 mg, 59%). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 2.32 (s, 3H), 2.55 (m, 4H), 2.99 (m, 4H), 6.45 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 6.57 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (dd, J= 9 Hz and 9Hz, 1H). ESI-MS inz 237.3 (MH*).

321 N l1 2 N~

H

2 N [00585) 3-(4-Methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-benzene-1,2-diamine: To a solution of 3-(4 methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-2-nitro-phenylamine (139 mg, 0.59 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) were added Pd/C (10%, 14 mg) and the mixture was stirred under atmospheric hydrogen (balloon) at the room temperature for I h. The reaction mixture was filter over Celite to afford the title compound (120 mg, 99%). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 2.34 (s, 31-), 2.62 (br, 414), 2.99 (m, 4H), 6.51-6.65 (3H). ESI-MS i/z 207.1 (MH*). N .- N O N NI ~- N A 0 [00586] 4-(2-Methoxy-pyridin-3-y)-2-[7-(4-methyl-piperazin1-yl)-1H benzoimidazol-2-yl]-phenol: To mixture of 2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl) benzaldehyde (57 mg, 0.25 mmol) and 3-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-benzene-1,2-diamine (51 mg, 0.25 mol) was added DMA (1 mL) and the resulting solution was stirred at the room temperature for 15 min, heated at 110 "C for 15 h open to the air, concentrated under reduced pressure. The residual crude was purified by chromatography (500:10:1 CH 2

C

2 /MeOH/28% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (10.8 img, 10.5%). 'H NMR (MeOl-d 4 ) 3 2.41 (s, 3H), 2.78 (m, 4H), 3.49 (in, 4H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 6.72 (m, 1H) 7.05-7.20 (4H), 7.56 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.10-8.13 (2H). ESI-MS n/z 416.5 (MW). o ONa

H

2

N

0 2

N

322 [00587] 2 -Amino-3-nitro-benzoic acid sodium salt: A suspension of 2-amino-3 nitro-benzoic acid methyl ester (785 mg, 4 mmol) and sodium hydroxide (194 mg, 4.4 mmol) in mixed solvent of EtOH (2 mL) and water (2 mL) was heated at 80 *C for 5 h. After it was cooled to the room temperature, the red colored precipitate was formed and dried at 40 *C under reduced pressure to afford the crude product. 0 N N

H

2 N N 0 2 N [00588] 2-Amino-N-{4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-3-nitro benzamide: To a mixture of 2 -amino-3-nitro-benzoic acid sodium salt (205 mug, 1.0 mmol), 4

-[

2

-(

4 -mcthyl-piperazin-l-y1)-ethyl]-phenylamine (219 mg, 1.0 mmol) and HATU (400 mg, 1.05 mrnol) in DMF (2 mL) was added DIEA (0.52 mL, 388 mg, 3.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h and heated at 70 *C for I h, and then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (50:10:1

CH

2

CI

2 /MeOH/28% aqueous NH40H) to afford the title compound (300 mg, 78%). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 6 2.44 (s, 3H), 2.50-2.85 (12 H), 6.74 (dd, J= 9 Hz and 9 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.58 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.91 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.29 (d, J= 9 H-z, 1H). ESI-MS mz 384.5 (MH*). H2oC N N 0 NN

H

2 N [005891 2 ,3-Diamino-N-{4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-benzamide: To a solution of 2 -amino-N-{4-[2-(4-methyl-pipcrazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-3-nitro benzamide (300 mg, 0.78 mmol) in MeOH (100 mL) were added Pd/C (10%, 30 mg) and the mixture was stirred under atmospheric hydrogen (balloon) at the room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was filter over Celite to afford the title compound (261 rmg, 94%). 'H NMR (MeOH-d4) 6 2.39 (s, 3H), 2.55-2.83 (12 H), 6.62 (dd, J= 9 Hz and 9 Hz, 11H), 6.86 (d, J- 9 Hz, 1H), 7.08 (d, J=9 Hz, 1H), 7.22 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.54 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H). ESI-MS mn/z 354.3 (MT).

323 \/ 0 N N - N NN 0 [005901 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-4 carboxylic acid 4 -[2-( 4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: To mixture of 2 hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde (65 mg, 0.283 mmol) and 2,3-diamino-N

{

4

-[

2

-(

4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl)-phenyl}-benzamide (100 mg, 0.283 mol) was added DMA (3 mL) and the resulting solution was stirred at the room temperature for 1 h, heated at 110 *C for 15 h open to the air, concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with DMSO (1.5 mL), filtered and then purified with using HPLC (TFA/H20/CH3CN) to afford the title compound (15.8 mg, 7 %). ]H NMR (MeOH-d4) 5 2.91 (s, 3H), 2.97-3.39 (12H), 3.98 (s, 311), 7.07 (m, 1H), 7.20 (d, J-- 9 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.60 (m, 11), 7.72-7.85 (4H), 7.94 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1), 8.10-8.18 (2H), 8.40 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 563.3 (M I [00591] Benzimidazole Amides formed from Methyl Ester 0 0

-

N - N X 0 [00592] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5. carboxylic acid methyl ester: To an ice-cold flask with a rubber stopper were added 2 hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde (2.29 g, 10 mol) and 3

,

4 -diamino-benzoic acid methyl ester (1.83 g, I I mmol) and the solid mixture was stirred at 0 *C for 15 min. Then DMA (10 mL) was added into the mixture via a syringe and the resulting solution was stirred at 0 *C for 1.5 h, and at the room temperature for 1.5 h. The rubber stopper was removed and the reaction mixture was stirred at 110 *C for 14 h open to the air. The DMA was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was mixed with 50 mL MeOH, and sonicated for 15 min. The mixture was filtered to get the solid precipitate, which was re crystallized in 300 mL MeOH to afford the title compound (1.6 g, 42 %). 'H NMR (DMSO d 6 ) 5 3.90 (s, 3H), 3.93 (s, 3H), 7.12-7.17 (2H), 7.65 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.76 (d, J= 9 Hz, 111), 324 7.83 (d, J= 9 Hz, IH), 7.91 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.20 (d, J= 6 Hz, I), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, 1H). ESI-MS miz 376.3 (MW). -N 0 \NH 2 ' - - - N N& OH [00593 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-311-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid hydrazide: To a suspension of 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl) phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid methyl ester (37.5 ng, 0.1 mmol) in EtOH (1 mL) was added anhydrous hydrazine (32 mg, 1 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 90 'C for 18 h, cooled to the room temperature, filtered to get the solid precipitate that was dried under reduced pressure to afford the title compound (25 mng, 33%). 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) 5 3.92 (s, 3H), 4.51 (br s, 2H, NH), 7.11-7.17 (2H), 7.63 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.79-7.85 (2H), 8.10-8.21 (2H), 8.29 (s, 1H), 9.87 (br, 1H, NH). ESI-MS n/z 376.3 (MH*. -N 0 HH N C H [00594] 2-[ 2 -lydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid methylamide: A suspension of 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl) phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid methyl ester (37.5 mg, 0.1 mmol) in aqueous methylamine solution (40%, 2 mL) was heated at 140 "C in a Biotage Initiator Sixty microwave reactor for 15 min, cooled to the room temperature, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (500:10:1 CH1 2 C1 2 /MeOH/28% aqueous NH 4 0H) to afford the title compound (19 mg, 50%). 'H NMR (DMSO-d) 8 2.84 (s, 3H), 3.92 (s, 3H), 7.11-7.17 (211), 7.62-7.83 (4H), 8.10-8.29 (311), 8.50 (br, 1H, NH). ESI-MS miz 375.3 (MH).

325 \ N N [00595] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid [6-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yI)-pyridin-3-yl]-amide: To a solution of 6-(4 methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-pyridin-3-ylamine (38.4 mg, 0.2 mmnol) in dry DCE (1 mL) were added AIMe 3 in toluene solution (2.0 M, 160 pL, 0.32 minmol), and then 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2 methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl)-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid methyl ester (37.5 mg, 0.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated at 80 *C for 16.5 h, cooled to the room, loaded on silica gel, and cbromatographyed (250:10:1 CH 2

CI

2 /MeOI28% aqueous NH 4 0H) to afford the title compound (10.7 mg, 20%). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 2.35 (s, 3H), 2.57 (n, 4H), 3.54 (m, 4H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 6.84 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.03-7.10 (211), 7.58 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.68 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.86-7.93 (211), 8.13 (m, 1H), 8.17 (s, 1H), 8.22 (s, 11), 8.41 (s, 111). ESI-MS m/s 536.3 (MRf. [005961 Benzimidazole Amides formed via Coupling of the Acid Derivatives General Scheme OH in", + RjR2NH OH FW = 361.36 + 78.12= 439,48 chromatography DIEA or C HATU HPLO punicafion \ F OMF TFA/ICHON NR1R 2 ( F N n OH n-0,l1or 2 326 General Scheme 2 Zn(CN), HOAc 02N Br Pd(Ph) 4 02N ON H2SO, HaF cHoh HNN_9 1 ~. ~ OH H21 120 C 0h 120C 0hb 73%

H

2 MOH H MOH OH OO rt 3 h H- I0 C.12 h- N 04% 0

H

2 N N N ^- N HATU , DIEA, DMF O OH -N \ / \ oH N OH N OH [00597] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid: To mixture of 2 -hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-benzaldehyde (22.35 g, 0.0975 mol) and 3

,

4 -dianino-benzoic acid ( 17 .2 g, 0.113 mol) was added DMA (120 mL) via a syringe and the resulting solution was stirred at 0 *C for 2 h, and at the room temperature for 3 h. The robber stopper was removed and the reaction mixture was heated at 110 "C for 14 h open to the air. The DMA was removed under reduced pressure and the residue was mixed with 200 mL E3tOAc, and sonicated for 15 min. The mixture was filtered to get the solid precipitate, which was mixture with 150 mL EtOAc, and sonicated for 5 min. The resulting mixture was filtered to get the solid crude that was dried at 40 *C for 6 h under reduced pressure to afford a mixture of the title compound and DMA (ratio 1:1) (16.15 g, 38 %). 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) 3 3.92 (s, 3H), 7.14 (m, 1H), 7.15 (s, IH), 7.64 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 7.74 (d, J= 6 Hz, 111), 7.84 (d, J= 6 Hz, 111), 7.91 (d, J=6 Hz, 1H), 8.19 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 8.21 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1W), 8.29 (s, 11). DMA also shows as 31.96 (s, 3H), 2.79 (s, 3H) and 2.94 (s, 311). ESI-MS mlz 362.5 (M*).

327 -N H N NH 2 - N OH [00598] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid amid: To a mixture of 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl} 3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (containing 1 equivalent of DMA, 145 mg, 0.33 mmol), NH4CI (160 mg, 3.0 mniol) and HATU (141 mg, 0.37 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) was added DIEA (0.52 mL, 388 mg, 3.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h and heated at 60 "C for 15 h, and then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (333:10:1 CH 2

CJ

2 /MeOH/28% aqueous

NH

4 0H) to afford the title compound (29 mg, 24%). 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) 3 3.94 (s, 3H), 7.11-7.17 (2H), 7.36 (br s, 1H), 7.64 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.83-7.88 (2H), 8.05 (br s, 1H), 8.19-8.21 (2H) , 8.30 (s, IH). ESI-MS ml 361.3 (MH). 00 -N \ N N N 0 [00599] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-plienyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid dimethylamide: To a solution of 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl) phenyl)-311-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (containing I equivalent of DMA, 44 mg, 0.1 nunol), dimethylamine in THF (0.5 mL, 2 M, 1 mmol) and HATU (38 rmg, 0.1 miol) in DMF (1.5 mL) was added DIEA (26 mg, 0.2 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for I h and heated at 65*C for 15 h, and then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography (500:10:1 CH 2

C

2 /MeOH/28% aqueous NLOH) to afford the title compound (3 1mg, 80%). 'H NMR (MeOH-d) 8 3.05 (s, 3H), 3.12 (s, 3H), 3.95 (s, 311), 7.00-7.06 (2H), 7.31 (d, J=9 Hz, 1H), 7.52-7.75 (4H), 8.08 8.14 (2H). ESI-MS m/z 389.5 (ME+).

328 -N N \ / O o H - -.. N A OH 1006001 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid [2-methoxy-4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-phenyl]-amide: To a solution of 2-[ 2 -hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (containing 1 equivalent of DMA, 44 mg, 0.1 mmol), 2-methoxy-4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1 yl)-phenylamine di HCI salt (29.4 mg, 0.1 mmol) and HATU (38 mg, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (1.2 mL) was added DIEA (45 mg, 0.35 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and heated at 60 "C for 3 h, and then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with DMSO (1.5 mL), filtered and then purified with using HPLC

(TFA/H

2 0/CH 3 CN) to afford the title compound (26.4 mg, 39 %). ESI-MS m/z 565.5 (MH*). \ N N N \ - N A 0 [00601] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid { 4

-[

2 -(4-pyridin-2-yl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: To a solution of 2 -[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (containing 1 equivalent of DMA, 44 mg, 0.1 mmol), 4-[2-(4-pyridin-2-yl-piperazin-1-yl) ethyl]-phenylamine (28,2 mg, 0.1 mmol) and HATU (38 mg, 0.1 mmol) in DMF (1.2 mL) was added DIEA (45 mg, 0.35 mmnol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and heated at 60 *C for 3 I, and then evaporated under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with DMSO (1.5 nL), filtered and then purified with using HPLC

(TFA/H

2 0/CH 3 CN) to afford the title compound (26.6 mg, 39 %). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 3.10-4.01 (12H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 6.87 (m, 1 H), 7.04-7.12 (2H), 7.21 (d, J= 9 Hz, IH), 7.36 (d, J = 6 Hz, 2H), 7.72-7.83 (5H), 7.89 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H4), 8.09 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (t, J= 3 Hz, 2H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H). ESI-MS n/z 626.5 (MI).

329 -N \ N N N 0 [00602] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid [ 2

-(

4 -pyridin-2-yl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 6 3.49-4.01 (12H), 3.98 (s, 3H), 6.88 (m, 1H), 6.90-7.11 (2H), 7.20 (d, J=9 Hz, 1H), 7.74-7.87 (4H), 8.03 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (m, 21H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.35 (s, 11-). ESI-MS rn/z 550.7 (Mt*. \-/ N- N /\ N N N 0 [00603] 2.-2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid ( 4

-{

2 -1 4

-(

2 -dimethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl]-ethyl}-phenyI)-amide: 'H NMR (McOH-d 4 ) S 2.56 (m, 2H), 2.83 (t, J =6 Hz, 2H), 2.96 (s, 6H), 3.06-3.68 (12H), 3.99 (s, 3H), 7.09 (m, 1I), 7.19 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.72-7.86 (5H), 8.03 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1ff), 8.15 (m, IH), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 620.7 (MH). \N N N N 0 [00604] 2

-[

2 -Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-be n z o i mida z o l e-5 carboxylic acid { 4

-[

4

-(

2 -dimethylamino-ethyl)-piperazin-1-ylmthyl]-phenyl}-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 )8 2.52 (m, 2H), 2.82 (t, J = 6 Hz, 2H), 2.93 (s, 6H), 3.12-3.56 (1OH), 3.99 (s, 3H), 7.09 (m, 1Hf), 7.20 (d, J= 9 Ijz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.74-7.92 (5H), 8.07 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (m, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s, 1H). ESI-MS nfz 606.5 (MH*).

330 NN N N N ~- N 0 [006051 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-y])-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid ( 4

-{

2

-[

4 -(2-hydroxy-ethyl)-piperazin-1-yl-ethyl)-phenyl)-amide: 'H NMR (MCOH-d 4 ) 52.97-3.40 (14H), 3.85 (t, J= 5 Hz, 2H), 4.00 (s, 3H), 7.10 (m, MH), 7.22 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.32 (d, J= 9 Hz, 211), 7.69 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.79-7.84 (2H), 7.89(d, J= 9 Hz, IH), 8.10 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.17 (m, 1H4), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.36 (s, IH). ESI-MS m/z 593.5 (MT). -N 0 S N NNC KAN 0 [00606] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid [3-m ethy-4-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-ylmethyl)-phenyll-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 6 2.34 (s, 3H), 2.85-3.40 (81), 2.87 (s, 3H), 3.78 (s, 2H), 3.99 (s, 311), 7.10 (m, lH), 7.21-7.39 (4H), 7.80-7.84 (2H), 7.90 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 8.15-8.18 (2H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 8.41 (s, 111). ESI-MS m/z 563.5 (MHf). rN Br 0 OH [00607] 2 -(S-Bromo-2-hydroxy-phenyl)-3H-benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4 [2-( 4 -methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl)-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 5 2.34 (s, 311), 2.50-2.85 (12H), 6.98 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.48 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.64 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.71 (d, J= 9 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=9 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H), 8.24 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 534.3 (MI-).

331 0 -- 0 [00608] 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-1H-benzoimidazole-5 carboxylic acid (1-methyl-piperidin-4-yl)-amide: 'H NMR (MeOH-d4) 8 1.68-2.28 (6H), 2.32 (s, 3H), 2.95 (m, 2H), 3.91 (m, 1H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 7.00-7.06 (2H), 7.53-7.62 (2H), 7.71 7.76 (2H), 8.08-8.14 (3H) ESI-MS mz 458.4 (MHf). ' General Scheme -N / \ 0 N\ / + R 1

R

2 NH -- N A OH -N conventional heating, C O microwave heating, 0 or Weinreb method H /_\_N

NR

1

R

2 -- N OH 0 2 N CN

H

2 N [006091 4-Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-benzonitrile: A suspension of 4-bromo-2-methyl 6-nitroaniline (11.5 g, 50 mmol), Zn(CN) 2 (770 mg, 150 mmol), and Pd(PPh 3

)

4 (2.32 g, 2.0 imol) in DMF (100 mL) was sealed and heated at 120 "C for 70 h. After cooled down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was purified by chromatography with CH 2 C1 2 to afford the title compound (6.4 g, 73%). ESI MS m/z 178 (MH).

332 0 0 2 N - OH

H

2 N [006101 4-Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-benzoic acid: To a suspension of 4-amino-3 methyl-5-nitro-benzonitrile (12.93 g, 0.073 mol) in mixed solvent of glacial acetic acid (50 mL) and water (100 mL) was added concentrated sulfuric acid (98%, 50 mL) slowly. The mixture was heated at 120 "C in sealed heavy wall flask for 20 h, cooled to room temperature and filtered to get the yellow precipitate which was dried at 40 *C under reduced pressure to afford the %/ H2S0 4 salt of title compound (13.5 g, 75%). 'H NMR (DMSO-d) 32.25 (s, 3H), 7.81 (s, 1H) and 8.48 (s, 1H). 0

H

2 N OH

H

2 N [006111 3,4-Diamino-5-mcthyl-benzoic acid: To a solution of the 1 H2S04 salt 4 Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-benzoic acid (116 mug, 0.47 mmol) in MeOH (40 mL) were added Pd/C (10%, 12 mg) and the mixture was stirred under atmospheric hydrogen (balloon) at the room temperature for 2.5 h. The reaction mixture was filter over Celite to afford the title compound (96 mg, 94%). 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) 5 2.06 (s, 3H), 4.85-4.95 (4H, NH), 7.00 (s, IN) and 7.04 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 167.3 (MW). -N 00 \ OH OH [00612) 2 -1 2 -Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl]-7-methyl-3H benzimidazole-5-carboxylic acid: To mixture of 2 -hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl) benzaldehyde (144 mg, 0.4 mmol) and 3,4-diamino-5-rnethyl-benzoic acid (82 mg, 0.5 mol) was added DMA (0.8 mL) and the resulting solution was stirred at 0 "C for 0.5 h, and at the room temperature for 2.5 h. After it was heated open to the air at 110 "C for 15 h, the reaction 333 mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residual crude was used for the next step reaction without purification. ESI-MS m/z 376.3 (MH). H N N NN N Nf~ IH - N OH [006131 2-[2-Hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl -7-methyl-3H benzimidazole-5-carboxylic acid {4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl)-ethyl]-phenyl}-amide: To a solution of the crude of 2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxy-pyridin-3-yl)-phenyl-7-methyl-3H benzoimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (estimated 0.4 mmol), 4-[2-(4-methyl-piperazin-1-yl) ethyl]-phenylamine (88 mg, 0.4 mmol) and HATU (167 mg, 0.44 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) was added DIEA (0.5 mL, 371 mg, 2.87 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 h and heated at 60 "C for 15 h, and then evaporated to dry under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with DMSO (1.5 mL), filtered and then purified with using HPLC (TFA/H 2

O/CH

3 CN) to afford the title compound (34.5 mg, 11% fro two steps from 3,4-dianino-5-methyl-benzoic acid). 'H NMR (MeOH-d 4 ) 8 2.77 (s, 3H), 2.90 (s, 3H), 2.97 3.43 (12H), 3.97 (s, 3H), 7.09 (in, 111), 7.22 (d, J= 9 Hz, lH), 7.31 (d, J= 9 IIz, 211), 7.70 (d, J= 9 Hz, 2H), 7.82-7.84 (2H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 8.17 (in, 1H), 8.20 (s, 1II), 8.31 (s, IH). ESI-MS mn/z 577.5 (IMH). Synthesis of the Fluorobenzimidazole derivatives 0 0 0 2 N H 0.5N NH3/dioxane 0 2 N 0 I H A 1-kj .H F F 90 oC,5h N F N H 1 2 1006141 4-Amino-2-fluoro-5-nitrobenzoic acid ammoniate (2): A suspension of 2,4 difluoro-5-nitrobenzoic acid (1, 5 g, 24.6 mmol) was heated at 90 "C in a sealed vessel for 5h and then cooled to room temperature. The yellow solid was collected by filtration and dried in vacuo at 40 "C for 20 h to afford the desired 4-amino-2-fluoro-5-nitrobenzoic acid ammoniate (2). An additional 6x5g batches were synthesized for a total of 35 g (0.172 mmol) 334 of 2

,

4 -difluoro-5-nitrobenzoic acid (overall yield: 36.1 g, 0.166 mol, 97%). 'H NMR (MeOD): 5 8.60 (m, 1H), 6.62 (i, IH,) 0a 0 2 N H- H MeOH/H 2

SO

4 OaN O N F H reflux, 24 h N F 2 3 [006151 Methyl 4 -amino- 2 -fluoro-3-nitrobenzoate (3): Sulfuric acid (10 mL) was added to a solution of 4 -amino-2-fluoro-5-nitrobenzoic acid ammoniate (10 g, 46 mmol) in methanol (100 mL) and refluxed for 30h. The solution was cooled to ambient temperature and the solid thus obtained was collected by filtration, washed with hexanes, and dried in vacuo at 40*C for 14 h to afford the desired methyl 4 -amino- 2 -fluoro-5-nitrobenzoate as a yellow solid (6.84 g, 31.9 minmol, 69%). 1H NMR (MeOD) 6 8.62-8.58 (m, IH), 6.63-6.59 (m, 1H). 00 0 2 N

-

H Pd/C N 0 N 1aF- K-O N F 3 4 100616] Methyl 4 ,5-diamino-2-fluorobenzoate (4): A suspension of methyl 4-amino 2 -fluoro-5-nitrobenzoate (6.84 g, 31.9 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (1.2 g) in methanol (200 mL) was hydrogenated under an atmosphere of hydrogen (balloon) for 20 h, filtered through Celite and the filtrate concentrated in vacuo to a residue. The residue was purified by flash chromatography (20% EtOAc/DCM) to afford the desired methyl 4,5-diamino-2 fluorobenzoate as a pink solid (2.36 g, 40%). 'H NMR (CDC 3 ) 3 7.90 (s, 11), 7.93 (s, 1H1), 7.13 (d, J-=8.7 Hz, 1H1), 6.88 (s, IH), 6.37 (d, J=13.5 Hz, 1W), 3.60 (t, J=6.9 Hz, 2 H), 2.86 (t, J6.9 Hz, 12H). HO Br LII7zICB(OH)2 Pd(PPh 3

)

4 HO H + N 0dPh) HO DME, Na 2 CO3 H 0a

H

2 0, 80 0 C, 20 h 7a 335 1006171 2-hydroxy-4-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzaldehyde (7a): Pd(PPh 3

)

4 (9 g, 0.008 mol) was added to a degassed suspension of 4-bromo-2-hydroxybenzaldehyde (5, 34.2 g, 0.17 mol), 2-methoxypyridine-3-boronic acid (6, 28.5 g, 0.186 mol) and sodium carbonate (18.5 g) in 1,2-dimethoxyethane (420 mL) and water (140 mL) and heated at 80*C for 16 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature and filtered through Celite. Celite was washed with chloroform (2 x 200 mL) and water (200 mL). The organic layer was separated and concentrated in vacuo to a residue which was re-crystallized from EtOAc/hexanes to obtain the desired 2-hydroxy-4-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)benzaldehyde (7a) after isolation by filtration (16.25 g). The filtrate from the recrystallization process was evaporated to dryness and the residue purified by flash chromatography (15% EtOAc/hexanes) to obtain the desired 2-hydroxy-4-(2-mnethoxypyridin-3-yl)benzaldehyde (11.87 g) in an overall yield of 28.12 g (72%). 'H NMR (C 6

D

6 ) S 11.06 (s, 111), 9.95 (s, 1H), 8.18 (dd, .=4.98 Hz, 1.83 Iz, 1H), 7.79-7.71 (in, 211), 7.60 (dd, J=7.29 Hz, 1.83 Hz, 111), 7.08-6.96 (m, 2 H), 3.99 (s, 3H). HO N Or 7b [00618] 4-(2-Ethoxypyridin-3-yI)-2-hydroxybenzaldehyde (7b) was synthesized as above by using 2-ethoxypyridine-3-boronic acid (6b) in the Suzuki coupling chemistry. 'H NMR S 11.05 (s, IH), 9.94 (s, 1H), 8.19-8.12 (m, 1H-), 7.81-7.73 (m, 211), 7.62-7.55 (m, IH), 7.08-6.96 (m, 2H), 4.46-4.35 (m, 2H), 1.45-1.35 (in, 3 H). HO 7c NMe 2 (00619] 4-(2-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethoxyjpyridin-3-yl}-2-hydroxybenzaldehyde (7c) was synthesized using {2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]pyridin-3-yl}boronic acid in the Suzuki coupling. 'H NMR 8 11.05 (br s, 1H), 9.94 (s, 111), 8.15 (dd, J=f4.95 Hz, 1.86 Hz, 1H), 7.90 (d, J=2.28 Hz, 11), 7.78 (dd, J=8.7 Hz, 2.34 Hz, iH), 7.62 (dd, J=7.34 Hz, 1.89 Hz, IH), 336 /.U/-6.01 (M, 21), 4.50 (t, J=5.85 Hz, 2H), 2.71 (t, J=5.82, 2H), 2.29 (s, 6H). ES-MS MHfe 287.5. -N N ~e0 Ome H + N OMe 1.MeOH, AcoH C2Me NH 2. DMA 120"C N F 7a 4 OHBa (006201 Methyl 6-fluoro-2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenyl}.1H benzimidazole-5-carboxylate (Sa): Aldehyde 7a (2.17 g, 9.46 mmol) and AcOH (2 mL) were successively added to a solution of ester 4 (2.3 g, 12. 5 mmol) in methanol (250 mL) and mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 6h. The solvent was evaporated in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in A,N-dimethylacetamide (48 mL) and the brown solution was heated at 120 *C for 6h. The solvent was removed in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash chromatpgraphy (20% EtOAc/hexanes) to afford the title compound, methyl 6-fluoro-2

[

2 -hydroxy-5-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenyl]-IH-benzimidazole-5-carboxylate as a colorless solid (8) (2.36 g, 63%). 'H7I NMR (CDC 3 ) 6 11.07 (br s, 1 H), 9.95 (br s, 1H), 8.17 8.20 (m, 1H), 7.79-7.71 (m, 21), 7.63-7.58 (m, 1H), 7.08-7.96 (m, 2H), 3.99 (s, 3H). -N -N \ / OMe --- N OMe O~eMeOK \ CO2Me 4N NaOH, MeOH N COOH OH N p 60 C, 24 h

-

F 8 9a 89 [00621] 6-fluoro-2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenyll-1H benzimidazole-5-carboxylic acid (9a): 4M NaOH (17 mL) was added to a suspension of ester 8 (2.36 g, 6 mmol) in MeOH (45 mL) and heated at 60 *C for 20 h. The solvent was removed n vacuo and the residue was dissolved in water (35 mL). The solution was made acidic using 2N HCI (pH=2) and the solid collected by filtration, washed with water (2 x 20 mL) and dried in vacuo at 40*C for 14h to afford the title compound 9a as a colorless solid (2.3 g, 100%). ES-MS MH+ 380.35.

337 -N 0 2 N N1. H2 Pd/C/MeOH _.0O 2N 0' NH 4

+

4 + 2. 7b/MeOH/AcOH N NF 2 N Fp OH 9b [00622] 2-[5-(2-ethoxypyridin-3-y).-2-hydroxyphenyl]-6-fluoro-H-benzimidazole 5-carboxylic acid (9b): A suspension of 10% Pd/C (10 mg) and amimonium salt 2 (100 mg, 0.45 mmol) was hydrogenated for 4h under ambient conditions. The reaction mixture was filtered through Celite and the Celite was washed with MeOH. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo and diluted with MeOH (15 mL). Then, aldehyde 7b (122 mg, 0.5 mmol) and AcOH (0.5 mL) were added and the purple reaction mixture was stirred open to air at ambient temperature for IS h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue thus obtained was used as such in the next step. ES-MS MH 394.5. - N - N OMe OMe NNCOOH 05 N, COOH HIstamine2HCI N N~%K HETU. DJEA- N OH THF/DMF 2:1 OH F 9a 10a [00623] 6 -fluoro-N-[2-(1H-imidazol-4-yl)ethyl]-2-[2-hydrox-5-(2 methoxypyridin-3-yI)phenylH-benzimidazole-5-carboxamide (10a): NN Diisopropylethylamine (4.6 mL, 26.4 mmol) and histanine-2HC1 (1.16g, 6.3 mmol) were successively added to a solution of acid 9a (2.3 g, 6 nmol) and HBTU (2.5 g, 6.6 mmol) in THF ( 70 mL) and DMF (35 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 18 h and the solvent was evaporated in vacuo. Water (35 mL) was added to the residue and the fine precipitate was collected by filtration and suspended in methanol/water (1/1, 100 niL). The suspension was stirred at room temperature for 14 h and the solid was collected by filtration and dried in vacuo at 40*C for 14 h to afford the desired 6-fluoro-N-[2-(lH imidazol-4-yl)cthyl]-2-[2-hydroxy-5-(2-methoxypyridin-3-yl)phenyl]1H-benzimidazole-5 carboxamide (I Oa) as a colorless solid. 'H NMR (DMSO-d 6 ) 8 13.79-11.28 (br s, 2H), 8.45 8.16 (m, 3H), 7.94-7.91 (mi, 2H), 7.69-7.51 (in, 3H), 7.17-7.11 (m, 2H), 6.88 (s, 1H), 3.92 (s, 311), 3.59-3.48 (in, 2H), 2.79 (t, J=6.6 Hz, 2H). ES-MS MH* 473.48. EA was in agreement with the formula C 2 sH 2

FN

6 0 3 -0.75 H20.

338 -N NON N N / IN N~ N N F OH 10b [00624] 2-[5-(2-Ethoxypyridin-3-yl)-2-hydroxypheny]]-6-fluoro-N-[2-(1H imidazoI-5-yl)ethyl]-1H-benzimidazole-5-carboxamide (.1b): was synthesized using aldehyde 9b in a similar manner as the methoxy derivative 10a in 16% overall yield. 'H NMR (IMeOD) 6 8.45-8.16-8.06 (m, 2H), 7.96 (d, J=6.36 Hz, 1H), 7.91 (s, 111), 7.76 (dd, J=7.32 Hz, 1.83 Hz 1H), 7.66-7.59 (m, 2H), 7.39 (d, J=11.31 Hz, 1H4), 7.09-7.01 (m, 2H), 6.93 (br s, 1H), 4.45-4.36 (m, 2H), 3.68 (t, J=6.96 Hz, 2H), 2.93 (t, J= 6.96 Hz, 21-1) 2.93 (t, J=7.02 Hz, 3H). ES-MS MHW 487.5. -N Me 2 --N 0 NCHO \& O N /- Me_2 OH 0 eN N OH + N F /\N~OMe N N F 7c 4 OH 8b 1006251 Methyl 2

-(

5

-{

2

-[

2 -(dimethylamino)ethoxylpyridin-3-yl}-2 hydroxyphenyl)-6-fuoro-1H-benzimidazole-s-earboxylate (8b): Diamine (44 mg, 0.24 mmol, 1.3 eq.) was added to a solution of the aldehyde (50 mg, 0.18 mmol, 1.0 eq.) and AcOH (0.05 mL) in MeOH (5 mL) and stirred overnight at ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was evaporated in vacuo and the residue was dissolved in DMA (5 mL) and then heated at 120 *C for Sh. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo to a residual oil which was purified by flash chromatography [1 0%(5%aq. NH40HMeOH)/DCM] (R=0.32) to afford the title compound as a yellow solid (31 mg, 39%). ES-MS MHt 451.47. -N /-- -N H CI 0 NMe 2 -. ... / 0 N + 1 -N1 O M e O H N F O OH FN F H OH 8c 9 339 [00626] 2-({3-[3-(5-Carboxy-6-fluoro-1H-benzimidazol-2-y)-4 hydroxyphenyl]pyridin-2-yl}oxy)-N,N-dimethylethanaminium chloride (9c): A solution of Ester 8c (31 mg, 0.071 mmol) in 10% aq. HCI (3 mL) was heated at 100 *C for 6 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient temperature and concentrated in vacuo to a residue and azeotroped with toluene (3 X 10 mL) to afford the title compound which was used as such in the next step. ES-MS MH* 437.47. -N -N \ / O Nt Cl- Me 2 H Histamine2HI o N NyNlzCOOHN N HBTU. DIEA N F THFIDMF 2:1 - N H OH 9c 10c [006271 2-(5-{2-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethoxy]pyridin-3-yl}-2-hydroxyphenyl)-6 fluoro-N-[2-(1H-imidazol-5-yl)ethyl]-1H-benzimidazole-5-carboxamide (10c): Et 3 N (0.079 mL, 0.568 mmol, 8.0 eq.) was added to a mixture containing the crude carboxylic acid salt 9c (0.071 mmol, 1.0 eq.), histamine-2HCl (16 mg, 0.085 mmol, 1.2 eq.), EDC (15 mg, 0.078 mmol, 1.1 eq.) and HOBt (11 mg, 0.078 mmol, 1.1 eq.) in dry DMF (2 mL) and stirred for 16 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by flash chromatography [10%(5% aq NH 4 OH/MeOH)/DCM] to afford the title compound (Rf'0.40) as a light yellow powder (20.1 mg, 53%). ES-MS M1H 530.30. 6.13 Example 13: Synthesis of Compounds According to Formula (6): 0 2 N

H

2 N [00628] 4-Iodo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline: To a mixture of 2-methyl-6-nitroaniline (106.5 g, 0.7 mol) and NaOAc (63.2 g, 0.77 mol) in acetic acid (525 mL) was added a solution of ICl (125 g, 0.77 mol) in acetic acid (350 mL). The mixture was heated at 80 *C for 50 min and poured into H20 (2100 mL). After stayed at the room temperature for 16 h, the mixture was filtered to furnish yellow solid that was washed with H20 (3 x 350 mL). Drying under reduced pressure at 40 "C for 48 h afforded the title compound (191 g, 98%). 'H NMR (CDCl3) 8 2.22 (s, 3H), 6.20 (br s, 2H NH), 7.53 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 279

(MH).

340 0 2 N F F

H

2 N / 1006291

(

4 -Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-difluoro-acetic acid ethyl ester: To a solution of 4 -iodo-2-methyl-6-nitroaniline (2.78 g, 10 mmol) and 2 -bromo-2,2-difluoroacetic acid ethyl ester (2.03 g, 10 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (20 mL) was added copper powder (1.28 g, 20 mmol). The mixture was purged with N 2 and heated at 60 "C in a sealed vial for 14 h. After being cooled to the room temperature, the reaction mixture was poured into 20% aqueous NH 4 CI solution (300 mL). The resulting mixture was basified to pHY =8.5 with saturated aqueous Na 2

CO

3 solution and was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 100 mL). The organic extract was washed with brine (2 x 30 mL), dried over Na 2

SO

4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (40:1 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford the title compound (1.79 g, 65%). 'H NMR (CDC 3 ) & 1.36 (t, 3H), 2.30 (s, 3H), 4.36 (q, 2H), 6.41 (br s, 2H NI), 7.51 (s, 1H), 8.33 (s, H-). ESI-MS nlz 275 (Mfl), 255 (M-F), 297 (M+Na), 549 (2M+l)* and 571 (2M+Na). O2N F F 2 N N

H

2 N / O [00630] 2-(4-Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-2,2-difluoro-1-morpholin-4-yl ethanone: A mixture of (4-amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-difluoro-acetic acid ethyl ester (3.5 g, 12.76 mmol) and morphine (20 mL, 20.0 g, 0.23 mol) was heated at 60 *C in a sealed vial for 3 h and was poured into 20% aqueous NH 4 CI solution (300 mL), resulting an aqueous mixture that was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 100 mL). The organic extract was washed with brine (2 x 30 mL) and dried over Na 2

SO

4 . Removing solvent under reduced pressure afforded the title compound (3.88 g, 96%). 'H NMR (CDC 3 ) 5 2.29 (s, 3H), 3.60-3.68 (4H), 3.68-3.81 (4H), 6.43 (br s, 2H NH), 7.48 (s, 1-1), 8.25 (s, 11-1). ESI-MS m/z 316 (Ml), 296 (M-F)t, 338 (M+Na), 631 (2M+I)* and 653 (2M+Na)+.

341 0 F F I 0 2 N N

H

2 N 1006311 4-(1,1-Difluoro-2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl)-2-methyl-6-nitro-phenylamine: To a solution of 2-(4-amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-2,2-difluoro-I-morpholin-4-yl-ethanone (945 mg, 3 mmol) in anhydrous THEF (15 mL) was added BHVS(CH3)2 (1 mL, 790 mg, 10.4 mmol) dropwise and slowly under N2 at 0 "C. The mixture was stirred under N 2 at the room temperature for 19 h and then refluxed under N 2 for 1.5 h. After being cooled to 0 "C, MeOH (2 mL) was added dropwise and slowly. The reaction mixture was poured into 20% aqueous NaHCO 3 solution (150 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL). The organic extract was washed with brine (2 x 10 niL), dried over Na 2

SO

4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (2:3 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford the title compound (740 mg, 82%). I NMR (CDC 3 ) 8 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.56-2.61 (4H), 2.93 (t, J= 12 Hz, 2H, CH 2

CF

2 ), 3.62-3.63 (4H), 6.34 (br s, 2H NH), 7.44 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H). (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 302 (MH*). Synthesis of Difluoro Compound General Scheme 1) MesLI 2) -- N HOCCHHOH 4)o12uene / OMe -780 110,6 h 29% OMD Ci NGui dioane H HOCHCHOH H H20 H KPO, W isopropano OH 70 C, 2 h OH 75C,22 h cl Ci 342 F F NOAC Cu powder O2, H 2 N - F m - DN0 8% 60 C 14 hN F F8H,

S(CH,)

2 F F$ 800,3h 1ng 96% H 2 N 2refux, 1.5 h HN Raney' NI cycIohexadjene H N OH N| rHI' H 2 N)? N, J EOH N H rt. 3.5 N 40 . 72 h 100%6 H 2 N 0.4% OH CI OMe 10 H 100632] 4 -Iodo-2-methoxynicotinic aldehyde: To a solution of t-BuLi (1.7 M, 7.36 mL, 12.51 mmOl) in 20 mL THF at -78 "C was added dropwise 2 -bromomesitylene (0.91 mL, 5.95 mmol). After stirred for 1 h, 2 -metboxypyridine (0.48 mL, 4.58 mmol) was added dropwise, and the mixture was warmed to 0 OC and stirred for 2 h. The solution was cooled to -78 "C and N-formyl-N, ',N'-trimethylethylenediamine (0.7 mL, 5.06 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at -78 "C for 30 min and then warmed to -23 *C. A hexane solution of n-BuLi (2.5 M, 2.75 mL, 6.87 mmol) was added dropwise, and the resulting yellow mixture was stirred for 3 h. The mixture was cooled to -78 *C and transferred via a double tipped needle to a solution of iodine (2.17 g, 8.23 mmol) in 30 miL of THF at -78 *C. After stirred at -78 *C for 30 min, the cooling bath was removed and the reaction mixture was allowed to warm to the room temperature. After the reaction mixture was cooled to -5 "C, aqueous solution of NIC (20 mL) was added dropwise and stirred for 15 min. The reaction mixture was poured into brine (300 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (5 x 100 mL). The combined extracts were washed with brine (2 x 50 mL), dried over Na 2

SO

4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (25:1 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford the title 343 compound (350 mg, 29%). 'H NMR (CDC 3 ) 8 4.05 (s, 3H, CH 3 ), 7.53 (d, J= 6 Hz, 1H, ArH), 7.85 (d, J=6 Hz, 1HI, Arm, 10.20 (s, 1H, CHO). 0 [006331 3-[1,3]Dioxolan-2-yI-4-iode-2-methoxy-pyridine: To a solution of 4-iodo-2 niethoxynicotinic aldehyde (5.26 g, 20.0 mmol) and ethylene glycol (2.48 g, 40 mmol) in toluene (400 mL) was added p-toluenesulfonic acid monohydrate (95 mg, 0.5 mmol). After it was refluxed under N 2 for 6 h, the reaction mixture was concentrated and the residue was diluted with 300 mL EtOAc and washed with 2 x 100 mL 10% Na 2 C0 3 solution. The aqueous solution was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL) and the combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine and dried over Na 2

SO

4 . Evaporation of solvent afforded the title product (6.07 g, 99%). '11 NMR (CDCl 3 ) 8 3.95 (s, 3H), 4.07 (m, 2Ff), 4.33 (m, 2H), 6.25 (s, 1H), 7.40 (d, J= 6Hz, 1H), 7.70 (d, J= 6Hz, 11-1). ESI-MS mIz 308.4 (MIHf. 0 0 OH Ci N OMe N [00634] (S)-1-(3-Chloro-phenyl)-2-(3-[1,3]dioxolan-2-yl-2-methoxy-pyridin-4 ylamino)-ethanol: A suspension of 3-[1,3]dioxolan-2-yl-4-iodo-2-methoxy-pyridine (3.07 g, 10.0 mmol), (S)-2-amino-1-(3-chloro-phenyl)-ethanol (1.71 g, 10 mmol), CuI (190 mg, 10 mmol), ethylene glycol (1.86 g, 30 mmol) and K 3 P0 4 (6.3 g, 30 mmol) in 2-propanol (200 mL) was scaled and heated at 75 *C for 22 h (CuI and K 3 P0 4 were crushed into powders before added). After cooled down to room temperature, the reaction mixture was loaded on silica gel. The chromatography with cluant CH 2 Cl 2 : MeOH = 100:1 afforded the title product (1.27 g, 38%). 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) 8 3.30 (m, 1H) 3.45 (M, 1I), 3.87 (s, 3H), 3.96-4.05 (4H), 4.85 n(m, 1H), 6.09 (s, 1H), 6.15-6.30 (2H), 7.21-7.35 (2H), 7.41 (s, 1H1), 7.82 (d, J= 6Hz, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 351.4 (MH).

3-" OH 0 H cl NO [00635] 4-[(S)-2-(3-Chloro-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethylamino]-2-oxo-1,2-dihydro pyridine-3-carbaldehyde: To a mixture of (S)-1 -( 3 -chloro-phenyl)-2-(3 -[1,3]dioxolan-2-yI 2 -methoxy-pyridin-4-ylamino)-ethanol (223 mg, 0.64 mmol) and H 2 0 (0.75 mL) was added HCI solution in dioxane (4 M, 10 nL). After it was heated at 70 "C for 4 h, the reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness. HPLC purification of the residue afforded the title compound (20.1 mg, 11%). 'H NMR (DMSO-d)8S 3.37 (m, 1H) 3.58 (m, 1H), 4.58 (m, iH), 5.95 (d, J=6 Hz, IH), 7.30-7.40 (3H), 7.49 (s, 111), 9.94 (s, 1H, CHO), 10.30 (m, iH, NH), 10.95 (m, iH, 1H). ESI-MS f/z 293.3 (MH+f OaN [

H-

2 N , [00636] 4 -Iodo-2-methyl-6-nitrouniline: To a mixture of 2 -methyl-6-nitroaniline (106.5 g, 0.7 mol) and NaOAc (63.2 g, 0.77 mol) in acetic acid (525 mL) was added a solution of ICI (125 g, 0.77 mol) in acetic acid (350 mL). The mixture was heated at 80 0C for 50 min and poured into H 2 0 (2100 mL). After stayed at the room temperature for 16 h, the mixture was filtered to furnish yellow solid that was washed with H20 (3 x 350 mL). Drying under reduced pressure at 40 *C for 48 h afforded the title compound (191 g, 98%). 'H NMR

(CDC

3 ) 8 2.22 (s, 3H), 6.20 (br s, 2H NH), 7.53 (s, IH), 8.34 (s, 11-). ESI-MS n/z 279 (MHf). F F 0 2 N

H

2 N 0 100637]

(

4 -Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-difluoro-nacetic acid ethyl ester: To a solution of 4 -iodo- 2 -methyl-6-nitroaniline (2.78 g, 10 mmol) and 2 -bromo-2,2-difluoroacetic acid ethyl ester (2.03 g, 10 mmol) in anhydrous DMSO (20 mL) was added copper powder (1.28 g, 20 mmol). The mixture was purged with N 2 and heated at 60 0C in a sealed vial for 14 h. After being cooled to the room temperature, the reaction mixture was poured into 20% 345 aqueous NH 4 CI solution (300 mL). The resulting mixture was basified to pH = 8.5 with saturated aqueous Na 2

CO

SO

4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (40:1 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford the title compound (1.79 g, 65%). 'H NMR (CDCl 3 ) 5 1.36 (t, 31-), 2.30 (s, 3H), 4.36 (q, 2H), 6.41 (br s, 2H NH), 7.51 (s, IH), 8.33 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 275 (MH*), 255 (M-F), 297 (M+Na)t, 549 (2M+1)* and 571 (2M+Na). F F O 0 2 N N

H

2 N / O [00638] 2

-(

4 -Amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-2,2-difluoro-1-morpholin4-y. ethanone: A mixture of (4-amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-difluoro-acetic acid ethyl ester (3.5 g, 12.76 umol) and morphine (20 mL, 20.0 g, 0.23 mol) was heated at 60 *C in a sealed vial for 3 h and was poured into 20% aqueous NH4CI solution (300 mL), resulting an aqueous mixture that was extracted with EtOAc (3 x 100 mL). The organic extract was washed with brine (2 x 30 mL) and dried over Na 2

SO

4 . Removing solvent under reduced pressure afforded the title compound (3.88 g, 96%). '11 NMR (CDC 3 ) 3 2.29 (s, 3H), 3.60-3.68 (41H), 3.68-3.81 (411), 6.43 (br s, 2H NH), 7.48 (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 316 (MH), 296 (M-F), 338 (M+Na)*, 631 (2M+1)* and 653 (2M+Na)*, F F O 0 2 N N

H

2 N [006391 4-(1,1-Difluoro-2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl)-2-methyl-6-nitro-phenylamine: To a solution of 2

-(

4 -amino-3-methyl-5-nitro-phenyl)-2,2-difluoro-I -morpholin-4-yl-ethanone (945 mg, 3 mmol) in anhydrous TIHF (15 mL) was added BII 3

-S(CH

3

)

2 (1 mL, 790 mg, 10.4 mmol) dropwise and slowly under N 2 at 0 *C, The mixture was stirred under N 2 at the room temperature for 19 h and then refluxed under N 2 for 1.5 h. After being cooled to 0 *C, MeOH (2 mL) was added dropwise and slowly. The reaction mixture was poured into 20% aqueous NaHCO 3 solution (150 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 50 mL). The organic extract was 346 washed with brine (2 x 10 mL), dried over Na 2

SO

4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography (2:3 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford the title compound (740 mg, 82%). 'H NMR (CDC 3 ) 8 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.56-2.61 (4H), 2.93 (t, J= 12 Hz, 2H, CH 2

CF

2 ), 3.62-3.63 (4H), 6.34 (br s, 2H NH), 7.44 (s, IHi), 8.25 (s, 1H). (s, 1H). ESI-MS m/z 302 (MH*). F F O

H

2 N N H2N- [00640] 5-(1,1-Difluoro-2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl).-3-methyl-benzene-1,2-diamine: To a solution of 4-(1, 1.difluoro-2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl)-2-methyl-6-nitro-phenylamine (60 mg, 0.2 mmol) in THF (5 rmL) was added Raney nickel (100 mg) and cyclohexadiene (0.5 mL). TLC indicated the formation of the product after the reaction mixture was stirred for 3.5 h). The reaction mixture was filtered over Celite and evaporated to afforded crude title product that was used for the next step reaction without purification. NH OH CI [00641] 4 -[(S)-2-(3-Chloro-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-ethylamino]-3-[6-(1,1-difluoro-2 morpholin- 4 -yl-ethyl)-4-methyl-1H-benzoimidazol-2-y l ]..H-pyridin-2-one: To a solution of 5-(1,1-difluoro-2-morpholin-4-yl-ethyl)-3-methyl-benzene-1,2-diamine (54 mg, 0.2 inmol), 4 -[(S)-2-(3-chloro-phenyl)-2-hydroxy-etylaminoJ-2-oxo-1, 2 -dihydro-pyridine-3 carbaldehyde (20.1 mg, 0.069 minol) in Et0H (9.5 mL) was added HOAc (0.5 mL). After it was heated at 40 "C for 72 i, the reaction mixture was concentrated. HPLC purification of the residue afforded TFA salt of the title compound (0.56 mg, 0.4%). 1 H NMR (DMSO-d) S 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.75-2.82 (4WH), 2.93 (m, 2H), 3.37 (m, 1H) 3.48 (m, IH), 3.56-3.72 (4H), 4.98 (a, LH), 6.17 (d, J= 6 Hz, 111), 7.02-7.51 (711). ESI-MS mnlz 544.3 (MH).

347 6.14 Example 14: IGF1R Activity of Compounds of the Invention [006421 The present example demonstrates the tyrosine kinase activity of certain compounds of the invention. [00643] Inhibition of IGF1R tyrosine phosphorylation was measured in the Alphascreen phosphotyrosine PT66 assay kit (Perkin Elmer Life sciences, Catalog number 6760602) according to the manufacturer's instructions. As a source of enzymatically active IGF Ir kinase for this assay, SF9 insect cells were infected with recombinant baculovirus (Bac-to-Bac System, Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA) encoding 6xHis-tagged kinase domain portion of human IGFIR precursor protein corresponding to the amino acids positions 974 through 1293 (Abbott et al., 1992, J. BioL Chem. 267:10759-10763) and recombinant kinase protein was purified to homogeneity using two-step chromatography on immobilized Ni 2 + resin (Ni-NTA) and ion-exchange Q-Sepharose column. Biotinylated poly glu-tyr 4:1 (CIS bio-international, catalog number 61 GTOBLA) was used for the kinase substrate. Compounds were serially diluted to give a concentration range from 20 to .1 IM and co incubated with IGFIr kinase, biotinylated peptide substrate and alphascreen components for 1 hour and then read in a Perkin-Elmer alphafusion plate reader. A plot of counts per minute versus log concentration of compounds was fitted to a sigmoidal dose reponse curve using Graphpad Prism software to generate IC 5 o values (see FIG. 1 for an example). [006441 Cell viability of either MCF7 human breast tumor cells (American Type Cul;ture Collection catalog # HTB 22) or NCI-H929 human plasmacytoma cells (ATCC catalog # CRL-9068) was assessed using the Promega CellTiter-Glo luminescent cell viability assay according to manufacturer's instructions. In brief, cells were plated at 10, 000 cells per well in a clear bottom white 96 well microtiter plate (Costar catalog # 3604) in 100 pL of cell growth medium. Compounds were then added to the cells to give final concentrations of compound ranging from 20 to .1 jiM. Cells were incubated 48 hours after which 100 RL per well of celltiter-glo reagent was added and luminescence was measured in a BMG polarstar plate luminometer. A plot of counts per minute versus log concentration of compounds was fitted to a sigmoidal dose reponse curve using Graphpad Prism software to generate IC 50 values. [00645] In the following table, the following symbols have the following meanings: A 5 5 gM; 5 pM <B s 10 gM; 10 M < C5 15 pM; 25 pM < D.

348 IGF1R Activity of Compounds of the Invention MOLSTRUCTURE IGF1R MCF7 H929 IC50 (uM) IC50 (uM) 1C50 (uM) A B B A C C A 0 D C C C, Al C B A B D A B S AW C B A B A A C B A D 0 A C B 349 MOLSTRUCTURE IGFIR MCF7 H929 C50 (uM) IC50 (uM) IC50 (uM) A C 0 A C B A C B A D B CA C C A C B A B A A D C A C C NON A C D A C C A B A 350 MOLSTRUCTURE IGFIR MCF7 H929 IC50 (uM) IC50 (uM) IC50 (uM) A D C A C A A B A A B A A C A A C A A C A 6.15 Example 15: TrkA Activity of Compounds of the Invention [006461 The present example demonstrates the tyrosine kinase activity of certain compounds of the invention. [00647} Inhibition of TrkA tyrosine kinase activity was measured using the Alphascreen phosphotyrosine PT66 assay kit (Perkin Elmer Life Sciences, Catalog Number 6760602) according to the manufacturer's instructions. As a source of enzymatically active TrkA kinase for this assay, the commercial preparation of recombinant TrkA kinase domain (Upstate Cell Signaling, Catalog Number 14-571) was used. Biotinylated poly Glu-Tyr 4:1 (CIS bio-international, catalog number 61 GTOBLA) was used for the kinase substrate. Compounds were serially diluted to give a concentration range from 10 to 0.005 VM and co incubated with TrkA kinase, biotinylated peptide substrate and Alphascreen kit components for 1 hour and then read in a Perkin-Elmer Alpha Fusion plate reader. A plot of counts per 351 minute versus log concentration of compounds was fitted to a sigmoidal dose reponse curve using Graphpad Prism software to generate ICso values. [00648] In the following table, the following symbols have the following IC 50 values: XXX < 20 nM; 20 nM < XX <200 nM; X >200 M. Structure ICSO TrkA Ho N OH xx N H -O N Nt XO OH N-C)O N N / o HO -N OH H 0~N OH N N x OHM0 N N CH, CN C5-H, 352 Nr -- 6 O H - UN N \ / <[H OH O-CH CHa \ /t OH NNOHOXX S CH - N j ~~.~ xxx N CH H0 \/ I H I OH OH 0 H

OH

353 OH 0 \N N N ] H I XJX N CH, OH H 0 / \ NNI N CH, - N H CHa XXX N OH 3 OH 0 N OHN 0 OH OHOH H N N CH, X CN

CH,

354 NCH3 x NF CH, OH M 0 -~ N X N OCHl N:q -N / \C0> OH -N CH, CH, O / \ N N - N OH H -N CH, O0 /\ )0N

OH

355 / H \ NXX

-

N OH H -N Cn]ral 'CH OH /-0\--N-' XX - N OH H -N Chlra OH0 C , N qN x OH -N OH -~ N, ~ OH -a OH OH H N CHa [00649] All publications, patents and patent applications cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication or patent application were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference. Although the 356 foregoing invention has been described in some detail by way of illustration and example for purposes of clarity of understanding, it will be readily apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art in light of the teachings of this invention that certain changes and modifications may be made thereto without departing from the spirit or scope of the appended claims.

Claims

1. A compound according to formula (1), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof: RL N Q1 Q 2 Q3 4 N 5Kl (1) wherein R" is selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, lower cycloalkyl-alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted heteroaryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl or heteroarylalkyl, heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl 10 alkyl, carboxamido, primary, secondary or tertiary carboxamido-, primary, secondary or tertiary sulfamido, hydroxy-, lower alkoxy-, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino, optionally substituted arylamido, or heteroarylamido, optionally substituted alkylsulfonyl, optionally substituted arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted sulfamido; 15 each Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 and Q 4 is independently selected from: (CH 2 )m (CH 2 )n (CH 2 )o (CH 2 )P Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 each m, n, o or p is independently an integer from 1 to 5; RL is a selected from the following: 358 X 24 through X 27 X 24 through X 25 ,V W* W*, HN W (CH2 M A N - (CH2)r, 2)r< w 6 0 M 1 O 40 X 24 through X 27 X 28 through X 31 /0 0 H W 2 W~ 0~ M 1 0 M 1 OX X 32 through X 35 X 32 through X 35 X 32 through X 35 HN (CHH) F ! HN M 1 0 M 1 O M 1 0 X 36 through X 39 X 36 through X 3 X 3 6 through X 39 (CH 2 )o HN C- HN ( M 1 0 M1 O M 1 0 X 24 through X 27 X 3 6 through X 39 (CH 2 )q HN (C2R (CH2) M 1 O M 1 0 M 1 0 X 36 through X 39 X 36 through X 39 I (C 2 ) I >(H) HN (C H N H C MX ) M 1 O M 1 0 H Z2A each m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v is an integer from 0 to 6; each W through WX is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen; 359 each R 1 0 is selected from di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl; 5 each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; X40 is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower alklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, 10 heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl; each Z' and Z 2 is independently selected from a chemical bond or (CH2)r, wherein r is an integer from 0 to 6, or -(CF 2 )-(C=O)- or -(CF 2 )-(CH 2 )- wherein any methylene group is optionally substituted; 15 M 1 is selected from: 4 1 X 41 XX4 X1x NN IN x 41 Z ' 4 ' K P x 4 x4H \ 41 X41 T1 M 2 is selected from: X41 XK41X4 X 4 X 4 1 4 1 /4 \ N X 4 41X 1 41X41 X(41 N X4 X41 X 4 1 41 N x4l 2X40 seHN 20 T' is selected from: 360 X4l X4l X(41 RK RK RK X41 X41 X(41 X41 X )41 N N A 3 X 4 1 N X 41 N X4l X41 X 41 N A 2 is selected from (CH2)q, -0-, -S-, -SO-, -SO 2 - and -N(X 4 1 )-; A' is selected from -CH 2 -, or C=O; R1 is selected from optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl; 5 each X 41 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, optionally substituted arylamino and heteroarylamino, optionally substituted; and each X 24 through X 39 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, 10 trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido, or carboxamido.

2. A compound according to formula (2), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof: X4 R1 x 3 W 6 y5 W 5 WW 7 R 6 N V 3 1 / R 2 X1Rw W2R 3 15 R4 (2) wherein each X 1 through X 5 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, 20 heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino; 361 each R 4 and R 5 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or lower alkylthio; W 1 and W 2 are either carbon or nitrogenl if W 1 is carbon, then W 2 is nitrogen and if W 2 is carbon, then W 1 is nitrogen; 5 each W 3 through W 7 is independently either carbon or nitrogen and if carbon, they can be optionally substituted by a substituent X 1 through X 5 ; each R and R7 is absent or independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, halogen, hydroxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, or lower alkoxy; each R 1 and R 3 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, 10 alkylamino, dialkylamino, acylamino, sulfonamido, and ureido; R 2 is selected from the following: x 2 0 P R 0 x-z~ 2l 0~ N-R 20o 2 4 18 H' H each R 1 8 is -N-(X 4 2 ) 2 ; each X 4 2 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, optionally 15 substituted, and two X42 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 members, optionally substituted; R 20 is selected from the following: 362 X 24 through X 27 X 24 through X 25 / CX 24 through X 27 W* *3 (CH) W4(CH2M R 14 'R10 -(CHO) W 1 A 1 R10 Ri X O X 28 through X 31 X 32 through X 35 X 32 through X 35 0 (C RF *1' _C-F "'Rio -(CH 2 )n X 32 through X 35 X 36 through X 39 X 36 through X 39 __ / OH S "C-R1 (OH 2 ) H 2 -- R10 H 2 C R 1 0 X 36 through X 39 X 24 through X 27 (CH 2 )r o(C\(H2'R0 2C N--R12 R10 (CH2)-R1O ~ ' /H t(H 2 C) (H) X42 A 5 ( R 10 N'X42 N 42 (H2)-Ri X42 N (CH 2 )u v(H 2 C) ; 1 NX4 2 X42 N (CH 2 )u each m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v is independently an integer from 0 to 6; R" is aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy; R 12 is heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl; 5 each W 1 through W 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen; each A' is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; X40 is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower alklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, 10 ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, 363 heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl; each A4 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, optionally substituted; 5 each X 4 2 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or two X42 are combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 members having from 0 to 3 heteroatoms; each A5 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, optionally substituted; 10 each R 1 4 is selected from di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl; each X 2 0 through X 2 3 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, 15 lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, 20 lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino; each X 24 through X 39 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido or carboxamido; and each R 16 is selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino, 25 N-heterocyclyl; each R 17 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, optionally substituted aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, optionally substituted arylamino and heteroarylamino. 30

3. A compound according to formula (3), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof: 364 x 3 I R1 x 2 W 3 X4 XW 2 -W 4 N .Wx N>N/ .X 1 / N N R2 Y - N R R 5 R 6 R4(3) wherein each W 1 through W 4 is independently carbon or nitrogen; each X 1 through X 4 is independently absent or selected from hydrogen, halogen, 5 trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, nitrogen-heterocyclyl alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, all optionally substituted by 10 groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino, any two groups taken together may form a cyclic structure; R4 is selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or lower alkylthio; each R 5 and R6 is independently selected from hydrogen or methyl, or may form a double 15 bond to oxygen thus forming an oxo-group, or may form a double bond to a nitrogen, thus forming an imino group, optionally substituted by lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyl-alkyl-alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl and heteroarylalkyl; Y is O or S or (CH2)q or NR 4 1 ; 20 q is an integer from 0 to 6; each R is independently hydrogen, lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heteroalkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclyl-alkyl-alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, optionally substituted; each R 1 and R 3 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, cycloalkyl, 25 hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, or ureido; each R 2 is selected from the following: 365 x 2 0 0~R2 F~N X2 H X 23 each R" 8 is -N-(X 4 2 ) 2 ; each X 4 2 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, optionally substituted, and two X42 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring with 4 to 8 5 members, optionally substituted; each R 2 0 is selected from hydrogen, Ci_ 1 4 alkyl, C 2 -1 4 alkenyl, C 2 -1 4 alkynyl, C 3 _14 cycloalkyl, heteroalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl, all optionally substituted; each X 24 through X 39 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, 10 trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido, or carboxamido; and each X 2 0 through X 2 3 is independently selected from hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower polyfluoroalkoxy, such as trifluoromethoxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, hydroxy, acyloxy, such as acetoxy or isobutyryloxy, 15 heteroalkyl, such as methoxyethyl or ethoxyethyl, nitrogen-heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, nitrogen-heterocyclyl-alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, all optionally substituted.

4. A compound according to formula (4), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt, hydrate or 20 prodrug thereof: XA1 XA5 XA2 A4 N N WA 5 XA6 XN.A3 N N-,, -'W6 XA 3 ' WA1 N N WA8 XA7 I H H I XA 4 XA8 (4) wherein each WAi through WA8 is independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom; 366 each XAl though XA4 is absent or independently hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino ; each XA 5 through XA8 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, 5 trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethoxy, optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino, nitrogen heterocyclyl, connected either by its nitrogen, or a carbon atom, nitrogen-heterocyclyl alkyl, connected either by its nitrogen or a carbon atom, all optionally substituted by groups selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, primary, secondary, or tertiary amino and 10 also the following: H NR20 H R 1 8 each R 18 is -N-(X 4 2 ) 2 ; each X 4 2 is independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, all optionally substituted, and two X42 can be combined to form an alkyl or heteroalkyl ring 15 with 4 to 8 members, optionally substituted; each R 2 0 is selected from: 367 X 24 through X 27 X 24 through X 25 / CX 24 through X 27 W *3 (CH2)m (CH2 - 4 'R10 -(CH X 2 8 through X 3 X 3 through X 3 X 3 2 through X 3 5 R H R10\ R 1 0 )O X28 through X31 X3 through X3 X32 through X35 - - 1 (C H oF RC-F X 3 6 through X 39 X 24 through X 27 (H) -\(CH2)-. ~ ' (C (H2)Rt0H 2 C) N--R12 R12 X42A 5 (2 R 10 N'X42N VO '-42 (CH2)tR1O X4 _(CH 2 )u v(H 2 C) ;' \N ,.X4 2 X4N (CH 2 )u each m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v is independently an integer from 0 to 6; R" 1 is aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy; R 12 is heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl; 5 each W through W 3 5 is independently selected from carbon or nitrogen; each A 1 is selected from carbon, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur; each X 40 is either absent or selected from hydrogen, lower alklyl, aryl and heteroaryl, all optionally substituted with lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, carboxamide, sulfonamide, sulfamide, ureido, methylenedioxy, 10 ethylenedioxy, primary, secondary or tertiary amino, mono or dialkyl amido, 368 heterocyclylamido, heterocyclyl, cycloalkyl, optionally substituted heterocyclylalkyl or heteroalkyl; each A4 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, optionally substituted; 5 each A5 is independently selected from methylene, nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur, optionally substituted; each R 1 0 is selected from di-lower alkylamino, lower alkylamino, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylaminoalkyl, heterocycloalkoxyalkyl, heteroalkyl, di lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, lower alkylaminocycloalkyl, heterocyclo-cycloalkyl, 10 heterocyclo-heterocycloalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl; each X 24 through X 39 is independently hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy, amido such as acetamido, or carboxamido; and each R 16 is selected from hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino, 15 N-heterocyclyl.

5. A compound according to formula (6), or a stereoisomer, tautomer, salt, hydrate or prodrug thereof: F F I..Rc XC( OH Xcs QC WC N Xc24/ Xc6~ WC 2 N 20 xc 3 XC 4 H XC 7 (6) wherein each WCl and WC 2 is independently a carbon atom or nitrogen atom; each Xcl through XC3 is absent or is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, cyano, 25 optionally substituted aryl or heteroaryl, aryloxy or heteroaryloxy, arylamino or heteroarylamino, optionally substituted; each XC 4 is selected from the following: 369 Yc1 OH H yc2 N yC3 / yC5 yC4 each Yci through yC5 is selected from hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, lower alkylsulfinyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, or trifluoromethanesulfonyl and can form a condensed ring such as 5 methylenedioxy or ethylenedioxy group; each XC5 through XC7 is independently selected from hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy; each QC is a carbonyl group or a methylene group; and each Rc is selected from nitrogen-containing heterocycloalkyl groups. 10

6. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 5 and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable diluents, excipients or carriers. 15

7. A method of modulating a tyrosine kinase comprising the step of contacting the tyrosine kinase with an amount of a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 5 effective to modulate the tyrosine kinase.

8. The method of Claim 7 wherein said tyrosine kinase is selected from the group consisting of Abl, Alk, CDK's, EGFR, EMT/Itk/Tsk, FGFR, FAK, Flk-1/KDR, HER-2, 20 IGF-lR, IR, Jakl, Jak2, Jak3, Tyk2, LCK, MET, PDGFR and Src.

9. A method of treating or preventing a condition or disorder related to tyrosine kinase activity comprising the step of administering to a subject an amount of a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 5 effective to treat or prevent the disorder.

10. The method of Claim 9 wherein said condition or disorder is selected from the 25 group consiting of cancer, diabetes, restenosis, arteriosclerosis, psoriasis, angiogenic diseases and immunologic disorders. 370

11. A method of modulating TrkA comprising the step of contacting the tyrosine kinase with an amount of a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 5 effective to modulate the tyrosine kinase.

12. A method of treating or preventing a condition or disorder related to TrkA activity 5 comprising the step of administering to a subject an amount of a compound according to any of Claims 1 to 5 effective to treat or prevent the disorder.

13. The method of Claim 9 wherein said condition or disorder is an inflammatory condition or disorder, a neuroinflammatory condition or disorder or a neoplastic condition or disorder. 10

14. The method of Claim 9 wherein said condition or disorder is selected from the group consiting of psoriasis, neuropathy, diabetic neuropathy, cancer, prostate cancer or breast cancer. CHEMBRIDGE CORPORATION WATERMARK PATENT AND TRADE MARKS ATTORNEYS P36481AU00